JP6756771B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

Some conventional game machines can perform an action effect that acts on a specific display corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the specific display can be changed by the action of the action effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-171589

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the effect of the action effect is insufficient.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect display means (for example, an image display device 5) and
The hold display displayed in the specific display means (for example, the active display area 81SG5F, the first hold storage display area 81SG5D, or the second hold storage display area 81SG5U) capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display on the effect display means. )When,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the execution of the effect,
With
The specific display means can display the specific display in a first display mode (for example, white) and a second display mode (for example, blue or red) different from the first display mode.
The effect control means
When the display mode of the specific display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the spear 81SG603 acts on the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (L)). Active display area 81SG5F piercing action production) and
It is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in a visibility change effect (for example, FIGS. 8-27 (M) and 8-27 (N)) that changes the visibility of at least a part of the effect display means. Vibration display effect that vibrates the entire image from side to side) and
When the action effect is executed, the visibility change effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (L) to 8-27 (N), the spear 81SG603 in the active display area 81SG5F. The part where the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 vibrates from side to side after being stabbed),
further,
Game medium inability or pass the first state and the game media predetermined region that can pass through a predetermined area are difficult second state and allows the change of variable Hente stage (e.g., the variable winning ball device 9015 or special variable winning ball device 9022) and
The advantageous state is a different state, the friendly Hente stage special conditions including changing to the first state (e.g., Koatari gaming state) controllable special state control means (e.g., a microcomputer for game control Steps S90358 to S90360 in 90560) and
In a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than a normal state. step S902208A, S902211A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, a portion) to perform S902214B,
The game price is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state.
It is provided with a granting effect executing means that can execute the granting effect when a value is given .
The friendly Hente stage, the game media to be controlled has been fired toward the movable Hente stage after being notified to the special state is provided so that it can not pass through the predetermined region (e.g., under a stream of game balls (It is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means for delaying the game and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds).
The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period.
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. rather lower than the rate (for example, in the case of Koatari the proportion of relatively change time is determined in the long second fluctuation pattern # 28 is not low (or determined) reference. FIG. 23),
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the giving effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the giving effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of directing can be improved, and the hobby of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The effect control means
As shown in the first aspect (for example, FIGS. 8-27 (J) and 8-27 (K)), the spear 81SG603 flies toward the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the action effect. As shown in the effect that the spear 81SG603 does not pierce the active display area 81SG5F and the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, FIGS. 8-27 (J) and 8-27 (L)), the spear 81SG603 is active. It can be executed by flying toward the display area 81SG5F and the spear 81SG603 sticking into the active display area 81SG5F), and when the suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the suggestion effect is performed in the first aspect. The spear 81SG603 did not pierce the active display area 81SG5F, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, for example, to execute the action effect and the visibility change effect at a higher rate than when executed in. In this case, the action effect and the vibration display effect are not executed, while the action effect and the vibration display effect are executed when the spear 81SG603 is stuck in the active display area 81SG5F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.
In addition, in order to execute the action effect and the visibility change effect at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect when the suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the suggestion effect is performed in the second aspect. When executed in, the action effect and the visibility change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and when the suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect, the action effect and the visibility change effect are executed at a rate of 0%. In other words, it includes a form in which the action effect and the visibility change effect are not executed.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2.
The effect control means
As an effect targeting the specific display, a special effect different from the action effect and the visibility change effect (for example, an effect of changing the size and shape of the active display area 81SG5F as shown in the modification 2) is executed. It is possible and
The action effect, the visibility change effect, and the special effect can be executed during the variable display of 1 (for example, as shown in the modification 2, the size of the active display area 81SG5F is large together with the action effect and the vibration display effect. The part that enables the effect of changing the shape of the sheath to be executed during the variable display of 1)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the number of effects executed during the variable display of 1, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The effect control means does not execute the action effect during the execution of the special effect (for example, as shown in the second modification, an effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F together with the action effect and the vibration display effect (for example,). When the effect of changing the size and shape of the active display area 81SG5F) can be executed during the variable display of 1, the action effect is not executed during the execution of the effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F. (Parts that shift the period during which each production can be performed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the special production and the action production from overlapping with each other, so that the special production can attract the attention of the player and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
The specific display is a display corresponding to the variable display during execution (for example, the active display area 81SG5F).
The specific display means displays the specific display in the first specific mode during execution of the variable display (for example, a portion of the active display area 81SG5F that starts light emission), and displays the specific display when the variable display ends. Display in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode (for example, a portion of the active display area 81SG5F that ends light emission).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific display is displayed in the first specific mode, the player can clearly recognize that the variable display is being executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 8-9) and
A special display means capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display / hold display update process) and
With
The effect control means
An effect display effect that displays an effect display in which the hold display displayed on the special display means shifts to the specific display means as the specific display when a new variable display is started (for example, in the modification 3). The transition effect shown) can be executed,
When the specific display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode, the effect display effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 3, the active display area 81SG5F starts emitting light. The part that executes the transition effect at the time)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed by the effect when the variable display is started, and the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
A determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol normal process) for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the variable display is started, and
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 8-9) and
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage, the determination means for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination means is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-10). The part to execute) and
A special display means capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display / hold display update process) and
Specific display means capable of displaying the specific display in an area different from the hold display during execution of the variable display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display / hold display update process).
With
The specific display means
Based on the determination of the determination means, a special effect (for example, a waveform notice effect) for displaying the specific display in a special display mode (for example, sawtooth waves of different sizes) and
Based on the determination of the determination means, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an active display area change effect) for displaying the specific display in a specific display mode (for example, blue or red) different from the special display mode. ,
The specific display has higher visibility than the hold display (for example, the active display area 81SG5F is displayed in the central portion in the left-right direction at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the display area is larger than that of each hold display. Because it is large, the part that is more visible to the player than each hold display)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the special effect or the specific effect is executed by displaying the specific display having higher visibility than the hold display in the special display mode or the special display mode, the player pays attention to the specific display mode. It can be collected and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The action effect is an effect of causing an action display (for example, the color ball 81SG931 shown in the modification 1) to act on the specific display.
The effect control means
The action effect is combined with a first pattern (for example, a success pattern shown in FIG. 8-31 (C) as a modification 1) in which the display of the action display is started and the display mode of the specific display is changed after a lapse of a predetermined period. , The second pattern (for example, the failure pattern shown in FIG. 8-31 (D) as a modification 1), which starts the display of the action display and does not change the display mode of the specific display after a lapse of a predetermined period, can be executed. And
After starting the display of the action display, the speed of the action display with respect to the target specific display can be reduced and displayed at a common timing in a predetermined period between the first pattern and the second pattern ( For example, the portion that executes the deceleration control shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) as a modification 1),
When the speed of the action display is reduced and displayed, at least one of the target specific display and the action display and a display other than the target specific display and the action display is displayed. Can be displayed by changing the display mode before displaying by reducing the speed of the action display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) as a modification 1, the speed of the action display is reduced. Display mode other than the hold display, active display area 81SG5F, and color ball 81SG931 is dimly displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved by changing the action display. In addition, it is possible to effectively incite whether or not the target specific display changes.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 8.
The effect control means
The speed of the action display can be reduced and displayed over a first period (for example, 3 seconds) and a second period (for example, 5 seconds) different from the first period.
When the action effect is executed in the first pattern, the speed of the action display is reduced and displayed over the second period at a higher rate than when the action effect is executed in the second pattern. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as a modification 1, when the action effect is executed in the first pattern, the color is colored for 5 seconds at a higher rate than in the case where the action effect is executed in the second pattern. The part that executes the deceleration of the speed of the ball 81SG931)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed during the period in which the speed of the action display is decelerated, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 10-14. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-5513 in a game machine, a special state (for example, a high base state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) than a normal state. ) Is informed of the game machine to be controlled. In this game machine, even if the game medium is launched after being notified that the game is controlled to a special state (for example, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed), the variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device) ) Can be configured so as not to win a prize. However, when the variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable display with a long variable display period is executed and then controlled to a special state, the variable winning means cannot win the game medium, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Instead of not being able to do it, there is a risk that it will be less interesting. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that prevents a decline in interest.

(Means 10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the gaming medium can win a prize. The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) capable of changing between the one state and the second state in which the game medium cannot be won or is difficult, is different from the advantageous state. A portion for executing steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560 that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. ) And a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than a normal state. The variable winning means includes steps S902208A, S902211A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, and S902214B in the computer 90560), and the variable winning means becomes the variable winning means after being notified that the special state is controlled. A game medium launched toward the player is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 9055 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0. The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state (realized by setting it to 8 seconds) is the first variable display pattern (for example, shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period. The second variable display pattern # 25, # 27) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display pattern # 26, # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. It is lower than the rate controlled by the state (for example, in the case of a small hit, the rate determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 93). It is a feature.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

(Means 11) In the above (means 10), the promotion notification means (for example, right-handed notification) capable of executing the promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route when controlled to the special state For example, the effect display device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, and the like), and the promotion notification means executes variable display by the first variable display pattern. The promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on whether the display is performed or the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, in the KT state, the fluctuation time is relatively long). When the variation display is executed by the long variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28), the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed.) ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

(Means 12) In the game machine of the above (means 10) or (means 11), the storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, the hit ball supply plate 903 or the surplus ball receiver 904) and the storage means are in a full state. It is equipped with a full tank notification means (for example, realized by displaying a character of "full tank error" or outputting an error sound in the effect display device 909) capable of executing a full tank notification indicating that there is. The full tank notification means may be able to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when it is controlled to the advantageous state and when it is controlled to the special state. (For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed. May be executed.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

(Means 13) In the gaming machines of (Means 10) to (Means 12), in the special state, the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed, and then the special state is controlled again. A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a continuous small hit effect) (for example, a portion that executes steps S90933 and S90944 according to the process table selected in step S90928 in the effect control microcomputer 90200). May be provided.
According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the gametability regarding the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 14) In any of the above (Means 10) to (Means 13), the counting display (for example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). For example, a counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S90707 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) capable of updating and displaying the prize ball number display) is provided, and the counting display executing means displays the updated counting result. The count display is updated by the first pattern, which is the first specific period, and the second pattern, which is the second specific period in which the period until the updated count result is displayed is longer than the first specific period. It is possible to display (for example, when displaying the prize ball number display 90300 in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the second KT pattern is used. When displaying the prize ball number display 90305, the number of prize balls may be incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)).
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the image display device in this embodiment. It is a block diagram in the effect control board. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is a diagram exemplifying the fluctuation pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing the reliability for each reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for effect control, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. It is a figure which shows. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. (A) is a figure which shows the decision ratio of the waveform notice effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the decision ratio of the hold display notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waveform advance notice effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of active display area change effect determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the active display area change effect, and m (B) is a diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the development destination suggestion effect decision processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio of the development destination suggestion production. (A) is a diagram showing an effect pattern of the first development destination suggestion effect, (B) is a diagram showing an effect pattern of the second development destination suggestion effect, and (C) is a diagram showing the first development destination suggestion effect and the first. 2 It is a figure which shows the production pattern of the development destination suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during variable display. Timing chart during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a frame buffer area when the vibration display effect is not executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a frame buffer area when the vibration display effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode in the image display apparatus during the variable display in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the hold change mode determination table in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the deceleration period determination table in the modification 1. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous small hit effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship between the content of hold storage and the limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the continuous small hit effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of features)
Next, the feature portion in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the image display device 5 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1, the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5 in the present embodiment. .. In the first hold storage display area 81SG5D and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U, a hold display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. Further, in the center of the lower part of the image display device 5 in the left-right direction, an active display area 81SG5F for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold storage during the variable display as the active display is displayed.

Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the hold display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (entering). The hold display generated based on the start winning by entering) is also changed to a round white display. Further, the active display area 81SG5F in the present embodiment is formed in a hemispherical shape having a larger display area than each hold display. That is, the active display area 81SG5F in the present embodiment is displayed in the central portion in the left-right direction at the lower part of the image display device 5, and has a larger display area than each hold display. The visibility from the person is high. That is, the visibility in this embodiment indicates the ease of recognition by the line of sight from the player. Therefore, the active display area 81SG5F is larger than the hold display as in the present embodiment, is displayed at a position that is easier for the player to see than the hold display, and has higher brightness than the hold display. It may include things and the like.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the effect control board 12 is equipped with the effect control microcomputer 81SG81 including the effect control CPU 120 and the RAM 122. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 81SG260. Of these, the ROM 121 stores data related to the image to be displayed on the image display device 5 for various effects, a time chart such as the start timing and end timing of the display, etc. for each type of effect, and the RAM 122 is illustrated. No Cancel counter is stored. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform display control such as generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 and adjusting the emission intensity of a backlight (not shown) based on the effect control command. Perform the process.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the display control unit 123 stores data such as characters (image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) as image element data used as a sprite image. A display control circuit is configured together with the CGROM 81SG205 and the SDRAM 81SG210 (synchronous DRAM) used as the frame buffer area 81SG501 (VRAM area, see FIG. 8-24).

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the image data ROM 81SG263 in which various image data are stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The image data ROM 81SG263 stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and background image image data. It is a ROM for keeping. The display control unit 123 reads out image data from the image data ROM 81SG263 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 81SG202 that stores various settings of the display control unit 123, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, such as the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, and the enlargement / reduction ratio. Frames the CG data stored in the attribute register 81SG203 that stores the palette number, coordinates, etc.), the drawing control unit 81SG206 that controls drawing of the image in the drawing area described later in the frame buffer area 81SG501, and CGROM81SG205. Video signals (R (red), G (green), B) for displaying image data stored in a display area described later in the data transfer control unit 81SG211 that controls transfer to the buffer area 81SG501 and the frame buffer area 81SG501. (Blue)) An integrated circuit equipped with an output control unit 81SG213 that outputs signals and synchronization signals, a DA converter 81SG214 that converts video signals output from the output control unit 81SG213 into analog signals and outputs them to the image display device 5. Is.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the CPU (CPU 120 for effect control) of the effect control computer 81SG81 via the CPU interface 81SG201. At the same time, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM81SG205 via the CG bus interface 81SG204. The system register 81SG202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 81SG203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 81SG202 and the attribute register 81SG203.

Further, the drawing control unit 81SG206, the data transfer control unit 81SG211 and the output control unit 81SG213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 81SG202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 81SG206 and the data transfer control unit 81SG211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM81SG205 and the attribute register 81SG203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 81SG210 via the VRAM bus interface 81SG209. A drawing control unit 81SG206, a data transfer control unit 81SG211 and an output control unit 81SG213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the frame buffer area 81SG501 of the SDRAM 81SG210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 81SG202 contains a system control register that stores instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register that stores interrupt signal output commands described later, a drawing area in the frame buffer area 81SG501, and palette data. A drawing register for storing the arrangement area of the data, a data transfer register for storing the transfer source address and the transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing the display area in the frame buffer area 81SG501, and the like are allocated. ..

The CPU interface 81SG201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The output control unit 81SG213 performs display processing to output the image data of the frame buffer area 81SG501 specified in the display register as a video signal.

The frame buffer area 81SG501 of the SDRAM 81SG210 includes a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which necessary characters are read from the CGROM81SG205 and stored, and palette data when the drawing control unit 81SG206 draws an image. Each area such as a CG buffer for temporarily storing (data in which the display color of the character is defined) and for temporarily storing CG data when the drawing control unit 81SG206 draws an image is allocated. Has been done.

Further, as will be described later, the frame buffer area 81SG501 is assigned a first drawing area (first image buffer area) in which image data displayed on the image display device 5 is stored, and the drawing area is divided into. By being specified by the display register, the image drawn and stored in the drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 81SG202 and the attribute register 81SG203 via the CPU interface 81SG201, and these systems are in accordance with the process data defining the display pattern of the image display device 5 described above. The display control unit 123 is indirectly controlled by storing the execution instruction and necessary data in the register 81SG202 and the attribute register 81SG203.

In the process data, the setting contents to be performed by the effect control CPU 120 for the system register 81SG202 and the attribute register 81SG203 are defined for each V blank. The setting contents of the system register 81SG202 include drawing, data transfer command, CG data for data transfer, palette data, and attribute setting. Further, the setting content of the attribute register 81SG203 is an attribute, that is, a parameter itself used when drawing a character.

Further, in the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every V blank. Therefore, the image is updated every V blank.

Here, drawing control will be briefly described. In order for the drawing control unit 81SG206 to perform the drawing process, the characters required for drawing need to be arranged in the frame buffer area 81SG501. That is, it is necessary to arrange the character that becomes the source data of the sprite image in the frame buffer area 81SG501.

Therefore, when executing various effects, the effect control CPU 120 issues a transfer command from the CGROM81SG205 of all the characters necessary for executing the effects to the frame buffer area 81SG501. Along with this, the data transfer control unit 81SG211 arranges all the characters necessary for executing the effect in the frame buffer area 81SG501. When executing the production, the same character is often used for drawing over and over again, but the data stored in the CGROM81SG205 is compressed and it takes time to read it, so as described above. By arranging all the necessary characters in the frame buffer area 81SG501 at the first stage of executing the effect, the time required for drawing can be reduced as compared with reading the data from the CGROM 81SG205 for each frame. .. In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect, the transfer command from the CGROM81SG205 of all the characters required for the moving image reproduction to the frame buffer area 81SG501 is executed. The character transfer command required for the above may be executed each time.

Further, in order for the drawing control unit 81SG206 to perform drawing processing, it is necessary that an attribute is set in the attribute register 81SG203. Since the attributes are different for each V blank, the attributes according to the process data are stored in the attribute register 81SG203 for each V blank.

Then, after starting the effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the attribute in the attribute register 81SG203 for each V blank, and then instructs the execution of reading the attribute. Along with this, the drawing control unit 81SG206 reads the attributes of the attribute register 81SG203, and when the reading is completed, commands the output of the reading end interrupt signal. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 commands the execution of drawing, and the drawing control unit 81SG206 draws the image data in the drawing area according to the read attributes.

Next, the effect control command output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the command 8001H is the first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the variable display result are displayed. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set in the case of "big hit".

In the variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the gaming state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXXH is a jackpot end designation command that specifies the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state, for example. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

Command B5XXH is an effect control command for notifying the remaining number of time reductions (variation number), and by setting EXT data according to the remaining number of time reductions (variation number), the remaining number of time reductions (variation number) is set. (Number of fluctuations) is notified.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 81SG5U or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number values MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating the part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation" when the variation display result is "big hit". It is a random value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 8-5 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to super reach E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-5 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

FIG. 8-6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table.

In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, a special figure is displayed according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used as the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained as "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the present embodiment) (about 1 in the present embodiment). / 30). That is, in the display result determination table, there is a probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

FIG. 8-7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment has a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". This is the table referenced to determine the number. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as "B".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-7 (B). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type includes high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and non-probability change jackpot B that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and shift to the low accuracy high base state are set. There is.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are used depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B". In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained, and the game interest is reduced. It can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The allocation of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the special figure display result is "big hit", and the special figure display result is "missing". A fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, which is used when it is determined in advance to do so, is prepared in advance.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved storage is 1 or less, and the variation pattern determination table for loss, which is used when the total number of reserved storage is 2 or more. A variation pattern determination table B and a variation pattern determination table C for loss, which is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach A loss to the variation pattern of super reach E loss (PA1-1). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take with respect to PA2-2 to PA2-6 and PA3-1 to PA3-4). Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach A loss variation pattern to the super reach E loss variation pattern ( A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take with respect to PA2-2 to PA2-6 and PA3-1 to PA3-4). Further, in the loss pattern determination table C, the range in which the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can be taken for the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is larger than that of the loss pattern determination table B. Random values are assigned as judgment values, and fluctuation patterns of normal reach loss (PA2-1), fluctuation patterns of super reach A loss to fluctuation patterns of super reach E loss (PA2-2 to PA2-6, PA3-1). The remaining random value in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to PA3-4).

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (detection order of game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random count circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment has the effect control data as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. A holding area 81SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 81SG190 shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 81SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 81SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 81SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 81SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 81SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 81SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 81SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 81SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 81SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 81SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 81SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 81SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 81SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 81SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 81SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage Corresponding area) and storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") And are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), the effect control buffer setting unit 81SG194 is provided with one storage area corresponding to the active display area, and the situation at the time of winning the variable display during execution. The data constituting the active display buffer 81SG194B capable of specifying the data is stored. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 81SG194A and the active display buffer 81SG194B are the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured by associating the variable category designation command and the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number “1”) is started. To go.

Further, the start winning command buffer 81SG194A and the active display buffer 81SG194B of the present embodiment indicate whether or not they are the target of the hold display notice effect and the effect mode (effect type) of the hold display notice effect. The hold display advance notice effect target flag and the waveform advance notice effect target flag indicating whether or not it is the effect target of the waveform advance notice effect described later and the effect mode (effect type) of the waveform advance notice effect are stored in association with each buffer number. A storage area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that it can be used.

In addition, in the hold display notice effect target flag, any value of "0", "1", or "2" is stored in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, and the hold display notice effect If the execution is not decided (if it is not decided to be the target of the hold display notice effect), "0" is stored, and if the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided, "1" or "2" is stored. To. When "1" is stored in the hold display notice effect target flag, the hold display corresponding to the hold display notice effect target flag is displayed in a round blue display, and the hold display notice effect target flag is displayed as "1". When "2" is stored, the hold notice corresponding to the hold display notice effect target flag is displayed in a round red display.

Further, in the waveform advance notice effect target flag, any value of "0", "1", or "2" is stored in the pre-reading advance notice setting process described later, and the waveform advance notice effect can be executed. If it is not determined (if it is not determined to be the target of the waveform advance notice effect), "0" is stored, and if the execution of the waveform horizontal country effect is determined, "1" or "2" is stored. When "1" is stored in the waveform advance notice effect target flag, the amplitude of the amplitude in the active display area is increased over the period until the variation display corresponding to the entry in which the waveform advance notice effect target flag is stored is started. When a small sawtooth wave (waveform: small) is repeatedly displayed and "2" is stored in the waveform advance notice effect target flag, until the variation display corresponding to the entry in which the waveform advance notice effect target flag is stored is started. A sawtooth wave (waveform: large) with a large amplitude is repeatedly displayed in the active display area over the period of.

The effect control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning command buffer 81SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. .. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, if the command reception is based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the special figure hold storage In the storage area corresponding to each, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order, and the command reception is based on the start winning to the second start winning entry. If it is, the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the special figure hold storage. It will be stored in the order of the memory number notification command.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed, the buffer number “1-1” of the start winning command buffer 81SG194A when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The contents of the entry of are copied to the entry of the active display buffer 81SG194B, and the stored contents of the entry of the buffer number "1-1" of the command buffer 81SG194A received at the time of starting winning are deleted, and the contents after the buffer number "1-2" are deleted. The stored contents of the entry are shifted to the next higher entry.

Further, when the variation display based on the second special figure hold memory is executed, the content of the entry of the buffer number "2-1" of the start winning command buffer 81SG194A when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Is copied to the entry of the active display buffer 81SG194B, the stored contents of the entry of the buffer number "2-1" of the start winning command buffer 81SG194A are deleted, and the stored contents of the entries after the buffer number "2-2" are deleted. Is shifted to the next higher entry.

In the present embodiment, by executing the active display / hold display update process described later, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U can be displayed in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A. It is possible to display in a display mode based on the hold display notice effect target flag stored in the entry. Further, by executing the waveform advance notice effect execution process described later, the active display area 81SG5F is displayed in a display mode based on the value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag stored in each entry of the start winning command buffer 81SG194A. It is possible. The data stored in the active display buffer 81SG194B is deleted every time the variable display of the decorative symbol ends.

Next, the start winning determination process in the present embodiment will be described. In the start winning determination process of S101, as shown in FIG. 8-9, the CPU 103 first detects from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on the signal, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S81SG101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S81SG101; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (S81 SG101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (S81SG102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in S81SG102 (S81SG102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (S81SG103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in S81SG101 (S81SG101; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in S81SG102 (S81SG102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (S81SG104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S81SG104; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the second special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (S81 SG104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (S81SG105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in S81SG105 (S81SG105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (S81SG106).

After executing any of the processes of S81SG103 and S81SG106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (S81SG107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (S81SG108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of S81SG108, the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (S81SG109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (S81SG110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of S81SG109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variation display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variation display mode including the variation display time.

Following the processing of S81SG110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (S81SG111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of S81SG111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (S81SG112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (S81SG113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of S81SG113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (S81SG114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in S81SG114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S81SG115), and then the process proceeds to S81SG104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in S81SG114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S81SG116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-10 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S81SG112 of FIG. 8-9 as the winning random number value determination process. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, whether the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled as a "big hit" in the jackpot game state by the special symbol normal processing. Whether or not it is determined is made. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the S81SG112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined before the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not a big hit is made at the start of the variation display. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is, and based on this judgment result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, the hold display notice effect and the waveform notice effect will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine. The current gaming state in 1 is specified (S81SG121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of S81SG121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-6 is selected and set (S81SG122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S81SG109 of FIG. 8-9 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S81SG123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of S81SG122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

When it is determined by S81SG123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot does not occur at the time of variable display (S81SG123; N), the symbol corresponding to the variation display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the designated command is executed (S81SG124), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S81SG125). If the time reduction flag is not set (S81SG125; N), the loss variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time reduction flag is set (S81SG125; Y), the loss variation pattern determination table is selected. Select and set C (S81SG127).

The loss variation pattern determination table A is a loss variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table C is a loss variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, in addition to the loss variation pattern determination table A and the loss variation pattern determination table C, the loss variation pattern determination table used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more. Although B is prepared in advance, among these loss pattern determination tables A to C, the loss variation pattern determination table A can take a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination for a non-reach variation pattern. Values from 0 to A are assigned in the range, and in the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, 0 to 0 in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the non-reach fluctuation pattern. A value greater than A is assigned. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, values from B to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the loss pattern determination table A in S81SG126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a variation pattern, the determination at the time of winning a start is made by using the variation pattern determination table A for loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), when the S81SG123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of variable display (S123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for (S81SG128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in S81SG128 is executed (S81SG129), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Set (S81SG130).

After executing any of the processes of S81SG126, S81SG127, and S81SG130, the variation pattern determination table set in the processes of S81SG126, S81SG127, and S81SG130 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used. The variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined (S81SG131). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), when at least the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of S81SG131 to the effect control board 12 (S81SG132), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is completed.

Next, the effect control process processing in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-11, in the effect control process process of the present embodiment, after executing the look-ahead advance notice setting process, the waveform advance notice effect execution process (S81SG71) for executing the waveform advance notice effect and the hold. After executing the active display / hold display update process for updating the display mode of the display and the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F, any of the processes S170 to S177 is executed.

8-12 and 8-13 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in FIG. 8-11 as the lookahead advance notice setting process in the present embodiment. In the pre-reading advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-12, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 81SG294A (S81SG241), and then starts the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variable category command. , It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the values of the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the hold display advance notice effect target flag are undecided (that is, not set) among the entries for which the hold storage number notification command is set. (S81SG242).

Waveform advance notice effect target flag and hold display When there is no entry for which the value of the advance notice effect target flag is undecided (S81SG242; N), the pre-reading advance notice setting process is terminated, and the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the hold display advance notice effect target flag When there is an entry whose value of is undecided (S81SG242; Y), the entry is an entry of the first special figure reserved storage, that is, the buffer number is one of "1-1" to "1-4". Whether or not it is determined (S81SG243). When the entry is an entry of the first special figure reserved storage (S81SG243; Y), whether or not the buffer number of the entry is "1-2" or later, that is, the entry is the first special figure. It is determined whether or not it is the 2nd to 4th hold storage in the hold memory (S81SG244). It should be noted that the reason for determining whether or not the buffer number is "1-2" or later is to secure the waveform advance notice effect and the hold display advance notice effect. When the buffer number of the entry is "1-2" or later (S81SG244; Y), "1" or "2" is already set in the value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the value of the hold display advance notice effect target flag. It is determined whether or not there is an entry, that is, whether or not the waveform advance notice effect and the hold display advance notice effect are already being executed (S81SG245, S81SG246).

When there is no entry in which "1" or "2" is set in the value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the value of the hold display advance notice effect flag, that is, when the waveform advance notice effect or hold display advance notice effect is not executed. (S81SG245; N and S81SG246; N) determines whether or not all the variable category designation commands in the first special figure hold storage before the entry are non-reach (S81SG247). When all the variable category designation commands in the first special figure hold storage before the entry are non-reach (S81SG247; Y), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the waveform advance notice effect determination random number, and the symbol specification command of the entry. And, the presence / absence of execution of the waveform advance notice effect and the effect type are determined using the variable category command and the waveform advance notice effect determination table (not shown) (S81SG248). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the waveform advance notice effect can be executed only when all the variable category designation commands in the first special figure hold memory before the entry are non-reach, the waveform advance notice effect and the reach effect can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the players from being executed in parallel, and to focus the player on only the reach effect or the waveform advance notice effect to improve the game entertainment.

In the processing of S81SG248, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), when the symbol designation command and the variation category show non-reach loss, the non-execution of the waveform advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and 5%. It is determined that the waveform advance notice effect is executed in the effect type A at a rate, and that the waveform advance notice effect is executed in the effect type B at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the symbol designation command and the fluctuation category indicate normal reach loss, it is decided that the waveform advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 80%, and that the waveform advance notice effect is executed at the effect type A at a rate of 20%. , It is decided to execute the waveform preview effect in the effect type B at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the symbol designation command and the fluctuation category indicate super reach loss, it is decided that the waveform advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 60%, and that the waveform advance notice effect is executed at the effect type A at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the waveform preview effect in the effect type B at a rate of 10%. Then, when the symbol designation command and the variation category indicate a big hit, it is decided not to execute the waveform advance notice effect at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to execute the waveform advance notice effect in the effect type A at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the waveform notice effect in the effect type B at a rate of 60%.

The effect type A is an effect type (display mode) in which a sawtooth wave (waveform: small) having a small amplitude is repeatedly displayed in the active display area 81SG5F, and the effect type B is an effect type B having a large amplitude in the active display area 81SG5F. This is an effect type (display mode) in which a sawtooth wave (waveform: large) is repeatedly displayed. When the sawtooth wave with a large amplitude is repeatedly displayed in the active display area 81SG5F by determining whether or not the waveform advance notice effect is executed and the effect type, the sawtooth wave with a small amplitude is repeatedly displayed in the active display area 81SG5F. The variable display result of the notice target becomes a big hit at a higher rate than the case where it is done. That is, in the waveform advance notice effect, the jackpot expectation is set highest when the waveform advance notice effect is executed in the effect type B, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the waveform advance notice effect is not executed (waveform advance notice). Expectation of big hit in production: Production type B> Production type A> Waveform notice production not executed).

Then, returning to FIG. 8-12, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the waveform advance notice effect is determined in S81SG248 (S81SG249). When the execution of the waveform advance notice effect is decided in S81SG248, a value corresponding to the effect type determined in S81SG248 is set in the waveform advance notice effect target flag of the entry ("1" for the effect type A, or "1" for the effect type B). “2”) is set (S81SG250). Then, a value corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, "0" indicating that the hold display is displayed in white) is set in the hold display notice effect target flag of the entry, and the lookahead notice setting process is performed. Ends (S81SG251).

When the entry in which the values of the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the hold display advance notice effect target flag are undecided is the second special figure hold memory (S81SG243), the waveform advance notice effect target flag or the hold display advance notice effect target flag is already set. When the values of "1" and "2" are set (S81SG245; Y or S81SG246; Y), and when it is decided not to execute the waveform advance notice effect in S81SG248 (S81SG249; N), the waveform advance notice effect of the entry is made. The target flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the non-execution of the waveform advance notice effect (S81SG251), and the hold display advance notice effect target flag of the entry is a value corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display advance notice effect (that is,). “0”) indicating that the hold display is displayed in white is set, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (S81SG251).

Further, in S81SG247, when there is a variation category specification command other than non-reach in the variation category specification command in the first special figure hold memory before the entry in which the values of the waveform advance notice effect target flag and the hold display advance notice effect target flag are undecided ( S81SG247; N), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the symbol designation command, and determines whether or not the first special figure hold memory before the entry has a hold memory that is a big hit (S81SG253). When there is no hold memory that is a big hit in the first special figure hold memory before the entry (S81SG253; N), a random number for determining the hold display notice effect is extracted, and the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and not shown in the entry. The presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the effect type (display mode of the hold display) are determined using the hold display notice effect determination table (S81SG254).
In the processing of S81SG254, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), when the symbol designation command and the variable category show non-reach loss, it is decided at a rate of 95% that the hold display notice effect is not executed, and 5%. It is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type C at the ratio of, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type D at the ratio of 0%. In addition, when the symbol designation command and the variable category indicate a normal reach loss, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 80%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at a rate of 20% in the effect type C. It is decided, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type D at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the symbol designation command and the variable category indicate super reach loss, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 60%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at the effect type C at a rate of 30%. It is decided, and it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type D at a rate of 10%. Then, when the symbol designation command and the variable category indicate a big hit, it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect at a rate of 30%, and to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type C at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect in the effect type D at a rate of 60%.

The effect type C is an effect type (display mode) for displaying the hold display in blue, and the effect type D is an effect type (display mode) for displaying the hold display in red. By deciding whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect and the type of effect in this way, when the hold display is displayed in red, the variable display of the notice target is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in blue. The result is a big hit. That is, in the hold display notice effect, the jackpot expectation is set highest when the hold display notice effect is executed in the effect-specific D, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the hold display notice effect is not executed. (Expected jackpot in the hold display notice effect: effect type D> effect type C> hold display notice effect not executed).

Returning to FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined in S81SG254 (S81SG255). When the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in S81SG254 (S81SG255; Y), the hold display notice effect target flag of the entry is set to a value corresponding to the determined effect type ("1" for the effect type C, effect). If it is a type D, "2") is set (S81SG256), and a value ("0") corresponding to non-execution of the waveform advance notice effect is set in the waveform advance notice effect target flag of the entry to set the look-ahead advance notice. The process ends (S81SG258).

Further, in S81SG253, when there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the first special figure hold memory before the entry in which the values of the waveform notice effect target flag and the hold display notice effect target flag are undecided, or in S81SG254, the hold display notice effect is displayed. When non-execution is determined (S81SG255; N), a value (“0”) corresponding to non-execution of the hold display notice effect is set in the hold display notice effect flag of the entry (S81SG257), and the waveform of the entry. A value (“0”) corresponding to non-execution of the waveform advance notice effect is set in the advance notice effect target flag, and the pre-reading advance notice setting process is terminated (S81SG258).

It should be noted that the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which only one of the hold display notice effect and the waveform notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display notice effect and the waveform notice effect may be executed in duplicate.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect type A and the effect type B are provided as the effect types of the waveform advance notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of the waveform advance notice effect is provided. As the type, three or more types of production may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the effect type C and the effect type D are provided as the effect type of the hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice effect is not limited to this. As the production type of, three or more types of production may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the display color of the hold display is different for each effect type of the hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect type of the hold display notice effect is not limited to this. The size and shape of the hold display may be different for each.

Further, in the present embodiment, the target of the pre-reading notice effect is only the first special figure holding memory, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice effect is the second special figure holding memory. May be executed for.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in FIG. 8-11 as the waveform advance notice effect execution process in the present embodiment. In the waveform advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 81SG194A (S81SG261), and the value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag is “1” or “2”. It is determined whether or not there is an entry of, that is, whether or not there is a target hold storage for the waveform advance notice effect (S81SG262). If there is no entry for the waveform advance notice effect target flag value of "1" or "2" (S81SG262; N), the waveform advance notice effect execution process is terminated, and the value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag is "1" or "2". When there is an entry of (S81SG262; Y), it is determined whether or not the buffer number of the entry whose waveform advance notice effect target flag is set to "1" or "2" is "1-1" (S81SG263). ).

When the buffer number of the entry in which the waveform advance notice effect target flag is set to "1" or "2" is "1-1" (S81SG263; Y), the process proceeds to S81SG264, and the waveform advance notice effect target flag is "1". Or, when the buffer number of the entry set to "2" is "1-2" or later (S81SG263; N), the waveform advance notice effect executing flag indicating that the waveform advance notice effect is being executed is set. It is determined whether or not it is (S81SG265). When the waveform advance notice effect executing flag is not set (S81SG265; N), the waveform advance notice effect execution flag is set (S81SG266). Then, the waveform advance notice effect process table corresponding to the effect type (value of the waveform advance notice effect target flag) is selected (S81SG267), and the waveform advance notice effect process timer is started (S81SG268). In the present embodiment, the waveform advance notice effect process table corresponding to each effect type (effect type A and effect type B) is stored in ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is set and starts controlling the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and the like) of the waveform advance notice effect process table, and the waveform advance notice effect is produced. The execution process ends (S81SG269).

On the other hand, when the waveform advance notice effect executing flag is set in S81SG265, the value of the waveform advance notice effect process timer is set to -1 (S81SG270), and it is determined whether or not the waveform advance notice effect process timer has timed out (S81SG271). ). If the waveform advance notice effect process timer is out, the waveform advance notice effect process data is switched (S81SG272). That is, the waveform advance notice effect process timer is restarted by setting the next set waveform advance notice effect process timer setting value in the waveform advance notice effect process table in the waveform advance notice effect process timer (S81SG273). Further, the control state for the effect device (image display device 5) is changed (S81SG274) based on the display control execution data and the like included in the waveform advance notice effect process data set next, and the waveform advance notice effect execution process is completed. To do.

In S81SG264, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process. When the value of the effect control process flag is not the value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (S81SG264; N), the process proceeds to S81SG265, and when the value of the output control process flag is the value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (S81SG264). Y) clears the waveform advance notice effect process timer and the waveform advance notice effect execution flag (S81SG275 and S81SG276), and ends the waveform advance notice effect execution process.

FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process according to the present embodiment. In the variable display start process shown in FIG. 8-16, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (S81SG281). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (S81SG281; Y), the contents of the entry of the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A are copied to the active display buffer 81SG194B (update storage). (S81SG282a), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A are buffered. It shifts upward by one number (S81SG282b). The contents of the buffer number "1-1" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (S81SG281; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S81SG283). When the second variable start command reception flag is set (S81SG283; Y), the contents of the entry of the buffer number "2-1" in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A are copied to the active display buffer 81SG194B (update storage). (S81SG284a), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A are buffered. It shifts upward by one number (S81SG284b). The contents of the buffer number "2-1" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the second variable start command reception flag is not set (S81SG283; N), the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing S81SG282b or S81SG284b, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S81SG285).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (S81SG286). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the present embodiment, when the received variation display result specification command is the second variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from (a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the first variation display result specification command corresponding to the loss, the combination of the decorative symbols (loss symbols) in which the three symbols are not uniform is determined as the stop symbol.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry in the start winning command buffer 81SG194A in which the value of the hold display advance notice effect target flag or the waveform advance notice effect target flag is "1" or "2", that is, hold. It is determined whether or not the display advance notice effect or the waveform advance notice effect is being executed (S81SG287). When the hold display advance notice effect or the waveform advance notice effect is not being executed (S81SG287; N), whether or not to execute the active display area change effect that changes the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F during the variable display and the effect type are selected. The active display area change effect determination process (S81SG288) to be determined and the development destination suggestion effect determination process (S81SG289) to determine the effect pattern of the development destination suggestion effect that suggests the reach effect (reach effect of the development destination) to be executed in the variable display. ) And to proceed to S81SG290. If the hold display advance notice effect or the waveform advance notice effect is being executed (S81SG287; Y), the process proceeds to the S81SG290 process without going through the processes of the S81SG288 and S81SG289.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the process of S81SG290, one process table is selected according to the presence / absence of execution of the effect to be executed during the variable display and the effect type of each effect, and the process table of the one is used. Although the embodiment of starting the variable display is illustrated by using the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a process table dedicated to the presence or absence of execution of the effect to be executed during the variable display and the effect type of each effect is used. May be selected to start the variable display using each process table.

That is, during the variable display, as will be described later (see FIGS. 8-27), the action effect and the vibration display effect are executed as an integrated effect, but the process table for the action effect and the vibration display effect are used. By selecting each process table, the action effect and the vibration display effect may be executed individually. The same applies to the suggestion effect, the active display area change effect, the development destination suggestion effect, and the like.

In S81SG290, the effect control CPU 120 is a process according to the presence / absence of execution of the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) and the suggestion effect, start display effect, action effect, active display area change effect, and development destination suggestion effect described later, and the effect pattern. Select a table. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S81SG292).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (S81SG293). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S81SG294). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S81SG295). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variation of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172) (S81SG296).

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the active display area change effect determination process in the present embodiment. In the active display area change effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data (display result specification command) stored in the variation pattern specification command and display result specification command storage area read in S81SG285. The variation display result and the variation pattern are specified by referring to (S81SG301). Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the active display area change effect, and determines whether or not the active display area change effect is executed and the effect type using an active display area change effect determination table (not shown) (S81SG302). ).

In the processing of S81SG302, as shown in FIG. 8-18 (A), when the variation display result is non-reach loss, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the active display area change effect is not executed, and a rate of 5%. Determines to execute the active display area change effect with the effect type α, and determines to execute the active display area change effect with the effect type β at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a normal reach loss, it is decided to execute the active display area change effect at a rate of 70% and to execute the active display area change effect at a rate of 25% with the effect type α. It is decided to execute the active display area change effect with the effect type β at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is a super reach loss, it is decided to execute the active display area change effect at a rate of 50% and to execute the active display area change effect at a rate of 35% with the effect type α. , It is decided to execute the active display area change effect in the effect type β at a rate of 15%. If the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided to execute the active display area change effect at a rate of 0%, and to execute the active display area change effect with the effect type α at a rate of 25%. It is decided to execute the active display area change effect in the effect type β at a rate of 75%.

The effect type α is an effect type (display mode) for displaying the active display area 81SG5F in blue, and the effect type β is an effect type (display mode) for displaying the active display area 81SG5F in red. is there. By determining whether or not the active display area change effect is executed and the effect type in this way, when the active display area 81SG5F is displayed in red, the rate is higher than when the active display area 81SG5F is displayed in blue. The fluctuation display result is a big hit. That is, in the active display area change effect, the jackpot expectation is highest when the active display area change effect is executed by the effect type β, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when the active display area change effect is not executed. (Expectation of big hit in active display area change effect: effect type β> effect type α> active display area change effect not executed).

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is always executed when the variable display result is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is not limited to this. Even if it is a big hit, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to execute the active display change effect.

Then, returning to FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the active display area change effect is determined in S81SG302 (S81SG303). When the execution of the active display area change effect is determined in S81SG302 (S81SG303; Y), the effect type of the determined active display area change effect is stored, and the spear 81SG603 is stored in the active display area 81SG5F when the active display area change effect is executed. (See FIG. 8-27), it is determined to execute the action effect of sticking (acting) and the vibration display effect of vibrating the image displayed on the image display device 5 to the left and right together with the action effect (S81SG305). Further, when the spear 81SG603 described above flies toward the active display area 81SG5F, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the active display area change effect is executed is determined, and the active display area change effect determination process is terminated ( S81SG306).

On the other hand, when the non-execution of the active display area change effect is determined in S81SG302 (S81SG303; N), the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for suggestion effect execution decision and suggests using a suggestion effect execution decision table (not shown). Whether or not to execute the effect is determined (S81SG307).

In the processing of S81SG307, as shown in FIG. 8-18 (B), when the variation display result is non-reach loss, the execution of the suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 95%. Decide not to execute. If the variable display result is a normal reach loss, the execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Then, when the variable display result is a super reach loss, the execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the non-execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content (execution or non-execution of the suggestion effect) in S81SG307 and ends the active display change effect determination process.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the development destination suggestion effect determination process in the present embodiment. In the development destination suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of the super reach (S81SG311). When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S81SG311; N), the development destination suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S81SG311; Y). ) Extracts a random number for determining the development destination suggestion effect, and uses a table for determining the development destination suggestion effect (not shown) to perform the development destination suggestion effect to be executed in the variation display according to the variation display result. And the second development destination suggestion production (S81SG312).

In the processing of S81SG312, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the fluctuation display result is a loss (super reach loss), the execution of the first development destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and 90%. The execution of the second development destination suggestion production is decided by the ratio. Further, when the variation display result is a big hit, the execution of the first development destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the second development destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, in the development destination suggestion production, when the first development destination suggestion production is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the second development destination suggestion production is executed (in the development destination suggestion production). Big hit expectation: 1st development destination suggestion production> 2nd development destination suggestion production).

The first development destination suggestion effect is a spherical pseudo-active display 81SG700 (see FIG. 8-29) in which the active display area 81SG5F has the same diameter as the active display area 81SG5F in the period before the reach effect in the variable display. After moving to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, the shutters 81SG701 displayed on the image display device 5 are continuously breached, and the number of shutters 81SG701 that have breached the shutters 81SG701 is used as the number of shutters to be developed (the reach of the super reach to be executed). It is a production that suggests production). Further, the second development destination suggestion effect is a pseudo-active display 81SG700 (see FIG. 8-29) in which the active display area 81SG5F is spherical in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the period before the reach effect in the variable display. After moving, one shutter 81SG701 displayed on the image display device 5 is breached, and a roulette wheel (see FIG. 8-30) suggests a development destination (a reach effect of the super reach to be executed).

Although the pseudo-active display 81SG700 in the present invention illustrates a spherical shape having the same diameter as the active display area 81SG5F, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-active display 81SG700 is active. The display may be similar to the display area 81SG5F in at least a part of the display mode. That is, the "special display (pseudo-active display 81SG700)" in the present invention having at least a part similar to the specific display (active display area 81SG5F) has the same shape, size, and color as the active display area 81SG5F. A pseudo-active display 81SG700, a pseudo-active display 81SG700 having a similar relationship with the active display area 81SG5F, and the like are included.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the first development destination suggestion effect is determined in S81SG312 (S81SG313). When the execution of the first development destination suggestion effect is decided in S81SG312 (S81SG313; Y), the effect pattern of the first development destination suggestion effect is determined to be the effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display. , The development destination suggestion effect determination process is completed (S81SG314). Further, when the execution of the second development destination suggestion effect is decided in S81SG312 (S81SG313; N), the effect pattern of the second development destination suggestion effect is changed to the effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display. It is decided, and the development destination suggestion effect decision processing is finished (S81SG315).

In the processing of S81SG314, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (A) and 8-21 (C), when the reach effect to be executed first in the variation display is the reach effect of Super Reach A, The pseudo-active display breaks through 10 shutters 81SG701, and the display mode of the pseudo-active display is finally red (white to blue when the first shutter 81SG701 is broken, blue to green when the fourth shutter 81SG701 is broken, 7). The effect pattern A is determined to be green to purple when the first shutter 81SG701 is breached, and purple to red when the tenth shutter 81SG701 is breached. When the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach B, the pseudo active display breaks through 9 shutters 81SG701 (the 10th shutter 81SG701 fails to break through), and the pseudo active display is displayed. The display mode is finally purple (white to blue when the first shutter 81SG701 is breached, blue to green when the fourth shutter 81SG701 is breached, and green to purple when the seventh shutter 81SG701 is breached). Decide on B.

When the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach C, the pseudo active display breaks through 7 shutters 81SG701 (the 8th shutter 81SG701 fails to break through), and the pseudo active display is displayed. Is finally determined to be the effect pattern C in which the display mode is green (white to blue when the first shutter 81SG701 is breached) and blue to green when the fourth shutter 81SG701 is breached. Further, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the pseudo active display breaks through three shutters 81SG701 (the fourth shutter 81SG701 fails to break through). , The display mode of the pseudo-active display is finally determined to be blue (white to blue, 4 when the first shutter 81SG701 is breached). That is, in the first development destination suggestion effect in the present embodiment, the color of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 changes stepwise, and the selection ratio of each reach effect differs depending on the final color of the pseudo-active display 81SG700. At the same time, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the number of shutters 81SG701 that the pseudo-active display 81SG700 has exceeded.

In the present embodiment, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is any of Super Reach A to Super Reach C, the first development suggestion effect is performed with the effect pattern corresponding to each reach effect. On the other hand, if the reach effect to be executed first in the variation display is the reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the variation display is performed by executing the first development suggestion effect in the effect pattern D. Although the player cannot identify which of the reach effects, Super Reach D and Super Reach E, is the first reach effect to be executed in the above invention, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is super reach D or super reach E, the first development suggestion effect may be executed in the effect pattern corresponding to each reach effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S81SG315, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (B) and 8-21 (C), when the first reach effect to be executed in the variation display is the reach effect of Super Reach A, In the roulette after the pseudo-active display breaks through one shutter 81SG701, the effect pattern E in which the roulette stops at the option of "super reach A" is determined. Further, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach B, the roulette after the pseudo active display breaks through one shutter 81SG701 is an option of "Super Reach B". The effect pattern F that stops at is determined. Further, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach C, the roulette after the pseudo active display breaks through one shutter 81SG701 is an option of "Super Reach C". The effect pattern G that stops at is determined.

Further, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach E, in the roulette after the pseudo active display breaks through one shutter 81SG701, the roulette is an option of "Super Reach E". The effect pattern H that stops at is determined. Further, when the reach effect to be executed first in the variable display is the reach effect of Super Reach D, in the roulette after the pseudo active display breaks through one shutter 81SG701, the roulette is an option of "Super Reach E". The effect pattern I that stops at is determined.

Regarding each effect pattern of the development destination suggestion effect in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of the reach effect executed in the variable display, the first development destination suggestion effect, and the second development destination suggestion effect Depending on the relationship of the jackpot expectation with, the jackpot expectation of the production pattern A is the highest, and thereafter, the jackpot expectation is set to be lower in the order of the production pattern B, the production pattern C, ... the production pattern H, and the production pattern I. (Big hit expectation: production pattern A> production pattern B> production pattern C> production pattern D> production pattern E> production pattern F> production pattern G> production pattern H> production pattern I).

FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display during effect processing according to the present embodiment. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the respective values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer to -1 (S81SG401, S81SG402, S81SG403). Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out (S81SG404). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (S81SG405). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (S81SG406). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (S81SG407). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) follows the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (S81SG408).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the light emission start timing of the active display area 81SG5F with reference to the process data being executed (S81SG409). When it is the light emission start timing of the active display area 81SG5F (S81SG409; Y), the light emission display of the active display area 81SG5F is started according to the contents of the process data, and the process proceeds to S81SG411 (S81SG410). If it is not the light emission start timing of the active display area 81SG5F, the process proceeds to S81SG411 without executing S81SG410.

Further, in S81SG411, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the suggestion effect is being executed. When the suggestion effect is being executed (S81SG411; Y), the suggestion effect is executed according to the contents of the process data, and the process proceeds to S81SG413 (S81SG412). If it is not during the execution period of the suggestion effect (S81SG411; N), the process proceeds to S81SG413 without executing S81SG412.

In S81SG413, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration display effect is being executed. When the vibration display effect is being executed (S81SG413; Y). The start display effect is executed according to the contents of the process data, and the process proceeds to S81SG415 (S81SG414). If the vibration display effect is not being executed (S81SG413; N), the process proceeds to S81SG415 without executing S81SG414.

When the vibration display effect is executed as in the present embodiment, the image display device 5 is displayed in the frame buffer area 81SG501 as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (A) and 8-24 (B). A display area 81SG503 for displaying an image on the screen and a drawing area 81SG502 for drawing an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 are provided. Then, when the vibration display effect is not executed, the drawing area 81SG502 and the display area 81SG503 are overlapped at the same position in the frame buffer area 81SG501 to display the image on the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, when the vibration display effect is executed, the drawing area 81SG502 on the frame buffer area 81SG501 is moved left and right (or up and down) with respect to the display area 81SG503, so that the image is left and right or up and down on the display screen of the image display device 5. It should be displayed so that it vibrates. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (B), when the vibration display effect is executed, no image is drawn at the end of the display area 81SG503 because the drawing area 81SG502 moves with respect to the display area 81SG503. The non-drawing area 81SG504 is formed, and the position corresponding to the non-drawing area 81SG504 on the display screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in black, for example.

Returning to FIG. 8-22, in S81SG415, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the action effect is being executed. When the action effect is being executed (S81SG415; Y), the action effect is executed according to the contents of the process data to proceed to S81SG417 (S81SG416), and when it is not during the action effect execution period (S81SG415; N), S81SG416 Proceed to S81SG417 without executing.

In S81SG417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change timing of the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F (execution timing of the active display area change effect). When it is the change timing of the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F (S81SG417; Y), the active display area is according to the determined effect type (effect type α or effect type β shown in FIG. 8-18 (A)). The display mode of 81SG5F is changed, and the process proceeds to S81Sg421 (S81SG418). If it is not the timing of change of the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F (S81SG417; N), the process proceeds to S81SG421 without executing S81SG418.

Further, in S81SG421, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the light emission end timing of the active display area 81SG5F. When it is the light emission end timing of the active display area 81SG5F (S81SG421; Y), the light emission display of the active display area 81SG5F is ended and the process proceeds to S81SG423 (S81SG422) according to the contents of the process data. If it is not the end timing of light emission in the active display area 81SG5F (S81SG421; N), the process proceeds to S81SG423 without executing S81SG422.

Further, in S81SG423, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the execution start timing of the development destination suggestion effect. When it is the execution start timing of the development destination suggestion effect (S81SG423; Y), the display of the pseudo active display 81SG700 is started, and the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D, the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U, and the active display area 81SG5F are started. Hiding is started and the process proceeds to S81SG430 (S81SG424, S81SG425).

Further, in S81SG423, when it is not the execution start timing of the development destination suggestion effect (S81SG423; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the development destination suggestion effect is being executed (S81SG426). When the development destination suggestion effect is being executed (S81SG426; Y), it is further determined whether or not it is the end timing of the development destination suggestion effect (S81SG427). If it is not the end timing of the development destination suggestion effect (S81SG427; N), the development destination suggestion effect is executed according to the contents of the process data to proceed to S81SG430, and if it is the end timing of the development destination suggestion effect (S81SG427; Y), Finished hiding the first hold storage display area 81SG5D, the second hold storage display area 81SG5U, and the active display area 81SG5F (redisplay of the first hold storage display area 81SG5D, the second hold storage display area 81SG5U, and the active display area 81SG5F). ), And proceed to S81SG430 (S81SG429).

If the development destination suggestion effect is not being executed in S81SG426 (S81SG426; N), the process proceeds to S81SG430 without executing any of the processes S81SG427 to S81SG429.

In S81SG430, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation control timer is timer out. When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (SS81SG430; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbols). The image data of the screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (SS81SG431). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (SS81SG432).

Further, when the fluctuation control timer is not timer-out (S81SG430; N), after the execution of S81SG432, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timer-out (S81SG433). If the fluctuation time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S81SG435). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S81SG434; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the waiting process per special figure. Update to the corresponding value (S81SG435). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timered out, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

As described above, during the variable display in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) and 8-23 (B), when the variable display is started, the light emission of the active display area 81SG5F is emitted. When it is started and the light emission of the active display area 81SG5F ends, the variable display ends. That is, in the present embodiment, since the variable display is being executed while the active display area 81SG5F is emitting light, the player recognizes the light emission of the active display area 81SG5F and is executing the variable display. It is possible to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (B), the action effect in the present embodiment includes a first action effect in which the spear 81SG603 is stabbed in the active display area 81SG5F, and a first action effect in which the spear 81SG603 is stabbed in the active display area 81SG5F after the first action effect. It is composed of a second action effect in which an effect display 81SG603a (see FIG. 8-28) is additionally displayed on the spear 81SG603. Further, during the execution period of the action effect in the present embodiment, the vibration display effect is executed in duplicate.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (B), the vibration display effect starts during the execution period of the first action effect and ends at the end timing of the second action effect. Further, the overlapping execution period L2 of the vibration display effect and the second action effect is longer than the overlapping execution period L1 of the vibration display effect and the first action effect, and the vibration of the vibration display effect in the overlap execution period L2 is large. The value is larger than the magnitude of the vibration of the vibration display effect in the overlapping execution period L1. That is, during the execution period of the action effect in the present embodiment, the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 vibrates slightly over the period L1 in response to the spear 81SG603 being stuck in the active display area 81SG5F. Then, the effect display 81SG603a is additionally displayed on the spear 81SG603 over the period L2 (L2> L1), and the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 vibrates greatly.

(Display mode during fluctuation)
Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-25 to 8-30.

First, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) to 8-25 (E), a game ball is placed in the first start winning opening during execution of the variation display in a state where one or more first special figure hold memories exist. Wins a prize, and when the hold memory generated by the start prize is determined to be the target of the waveform notice effect (execution of the waveform notice effect is decided), a new hold display is additionally displayed in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D. At the same time, the waveform advance notice effect is started in the active display area 81SG5F. As described above, when the effect type of the waveform notice effect is determined to be the effect type A, the sawtooth wave 81SG601 (waveform: small) having a small amplitude is repeatedly displayed in the active display area 81SG5F, while it is started. When the effect type of the waveform notice effect is determined to be the effect type B, the repetitive display of the sawtooth wave (waveform: large) having a large amplitude is started in the active display area 81SG5F.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (F) to 8-26 (H), these waveform notice effects are immediately before the start of the variation display based on the hold memory, which is the target of the waveform notice effect (the target of the waveform notice effect). It ends at the timing when the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display based on the hold storage is finished). Although not shown in particular, when the hold memory generated by the start winning is decided to be the target of the hold display notice effect (execution of the hold display notice effect is decided), the hold display notice effect is set in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D. The hold display of the color according to the effect type of is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (I) to 8-27 (N), when a new variation display is started, a plurality of spears 81SG603 fly toward the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect. Is executed. At this time, if it is determined in the variable display that the active display area change effect is not executed, the spear 81SG603 is flipped off without being stuck (acting) in the active display area 81SG5F, and the variable display is continued. On the other hand, when the execution of the active display area change effect is determined in the variable display, the spear 81SG603 sticks (acts) in the active display area 81SG5F as the first action effect, and the image displayed on the image display device 5. The whole vibrates slightly from side to side. That is, the suggestion effect in the present embodiment includes the first aspect (failure pattern) indicating that the first action effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 8-27 (K), and FIG. 8-27 (L). ) Is provided with a second aspect (success pattern) indicating that the first action effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 (P) to 8-28 (S), when the effect display 81SG603a is additionally displayed on the spear 81SG603 stuck in the active display area 81SG5F as the second action effect, the image display device 5 The entire image displayed in is vibrated from side to side. Finally, the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F changes to a display mode (blue for the effect type α and red for the effect type β) according to the effect type of the active display area change effect.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (T) to 8-29 (V), when the variation display is a variation display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating the reach. Then, the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F returns to the display mode (white display) before the active display area change effect. Then, the display of the spherical pseudo-active display 81SG700 having the same color and the same radius as the active display area 81SG5F is started in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 (the active display area 81SG5F rises and changes to the pseudo-active display 81SH700. The first reserved storage display area 81SG5D, the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U, and the active display area 81SG5F are hidden. Further, the shutter 81SG701 is displayed behind the pseudo-active display, and the development destination suggestion effect is started. That is, the pseudo active display 81SG700 is displayed at an upper position (center in the left-right width direction and center in the vertical width direction) in the image display device 5 than the active display area 81SG5F, so that the player can see the pseudo active display 81SG700 from the active display area 81SG5F. Visibility is improved.

When the started development destination suggestion effect is the first development destination suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (W) to 8-29 (Y), the pseudo active display is performed as the first development destination suggestion effect. The effect that the 81SG700 continuously breaks through the shutter 81SG701 is executed. When the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701, the effect display 81SG702 is displayed around the pseudo-active display 81SG700. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the effect display 81SG702 to perform the pseudo-active display. It is possible to recognize that the display 81SG700 has exceeded the shutter 81SG701.

In addition, the display mode of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 changes according to the number of shutters 81SG701 that break through. Specifically, when the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through the first shutter 81SG701, the pseudo-active display 81SG700 changes from white to blue pseudo-active display 81SG700a. Further, when the pseudo active display 81SG700a breaks through the fourth shutter 81SG701, the pseudo active display 81SG700a changes from blue to green pseudo active display 81SG700b. Then, when the pseudo-active display 81SG700b breaks through the seventh shutter 81SG701, the pseudo-active display 81SG700b changes from green to purple pseudo-active display 81SG700c.

Further, although not shown, when the pseudo-active display 81SG700c breaks through the tenth shutter 81SG701, the pseudo-active display 81SG700c changes from purple to red pseudo-active display. In this way, by changing the display mode (display color) of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 according to the number of shutters 81SG701 that have broken through and the number of shutters 81SG701 that have broken through, it is executed after the first development destination suggestion effect. It is possible to suggest a reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (V) and 8-30 (Z-1) to 8-30 (Z-3), the started development destination suggestion effect is the second development destination suggestion effect. In this case, after the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through the first shutter 81SG701, the reach effect options 81SG711 to 81SG715 that may be executed after the second development destination suggestion effect are displayed as roulette. Roulette variation in which these options 81SG711 to 81SG715 sequentially emit light is started. Then, when the roulette fluctuation is executed over a predetermined period, one option finally emits light (the roulette stops (in the example of FIG. 8-30, "stops at the option 81Sg711 corresponding to the super reach A)). The reach effect is executed according to the light emitting (stopped) option. In the present embodiment, a mode in which a plurality of options are displayed as a roulette of the second development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention has the present invention. The present invention is not limited to this, and these plurality of options may be displayed so that the display areas of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 in the image display device 5 do not overlap, so that the player can easily identify these options. Further, these options may be displayed so as to overlap the display area of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 in the image display device 5 so that the player can recognize these options without significantly moving the line of sight.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an action effect in which the spear 81SG603 sticks (acts) in the active display area 81SG5F, and when the spear 81SG603 sticks in the active display area 81SG5F. Since it is possible to execute a vibration display effect as a visibility change effect that changes the visibility of the image display device 5, the effect can be improved by the synergistic effect of these action effects and the vibration display effect, and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as the visibility change effect, a mode of executing a vibration display effect that vibrates the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the vibration display effect may be an effect of vibrating only a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, vibrating only the active display area 81SG5F).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the visibility change effect, a mode of executing a vibration display effect that vibrates the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the visibility change effect is, for example, an effect of enlarging or reducing the image displayed on the image display device 5, an effect of changing the brightness of the image displayed on the image display device 5, or an image display device 5. It may be an effect of flipping the displayed image horizontally or vertically.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, the first vibration display effect and the second vibration display having a larger vibration width than the first vibration display effect are accompanied by the execution of the action effect. Although the embodiment in which the effect is continuously executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first vibration display effect and the second vibration display effect may be individually executed. When the first vibration display effect and the second vibration display effect can be executed individually, it depends on whether the first vibration display effect or the second vibration display effect is executed along with the execution of the action effect. The jackpot expectations may be different. By doing so, it is possible to have a correlation between the vibration width in the vibration display effect (the power of the vibration display effect) and the jackpot expectation, so that the player can pay attention to the vibration width in the vibration display effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (L) to 8-27 (N), the vibration display effect is executed after the action effect (first action effect) is executed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the vibration display effect may be executed from the timing when the action effect is executed or the timing before the action effect is executed. That is, the vibration display effect may be executed at the same time as the first action effect, or may be executed from a timing earlier than the execution timing of the first action effect. Further, when the vibration display effect and the action effect are executed, the color of the active display area 81SG5F can be changed after the vibration display effect and the action effect are completed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the active display area 81SG5F even after the end of the game, and the game interest can be improved.

Further, during the variable display in the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the action effect is executed, an effect in which the spear 81SG603 flies toward the active display area 81SG5F can be executed, and as the suggestion effect. When the spear 81SG603 sticks (acts) in the active display area 81SG5F, the action effect and the vibration display effect are executed, while as the suggestion effect, when the spear 81SG603 does not stick in the active display area 81SG5F, the action effect and the vibration are executed. Since the display effect is not executed, the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestion effect, and the game interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the spear 81SG603 flies toward the active display area 81SG5F and the spear 81SG603 sticks into the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect and an action effect, but the present invention is limited to this. As a suggestion effect, the rate at which the action effect is executed differs depending on the number of spears 81SG603 flying toward the active display area 81SG5F, or the number of spears 81SG603 stuck in the active display area 81SG5F. The rate at which the active display area 81SG5F turns red and the jackpot expectation may be different. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the spear 81SG603 flying toward the active display area 81SG5F, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the spear 81SG603 is stuck (acted) in the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect, the action effect and the vibration display effect are executed, while the spear 81SG603 is the active display area as the suggestion effect. Although the embodiment in which the action effect and the vibration display effect are not executed when the 81SG5F is not stabbed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spear 81SG603 is stabbed in the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect. In this case, if the action effect and the vibration display effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the spear 81SG603 does not stick to the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect, the spear 81SG603 sticks to the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect. However, there may be a case where the action effect and the vibration display effect are not executed, or a case where the action effect and the vibration display effect are executed without the spear 81SG603 sticking to the active display area 81SG5F as a suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the suggestion effect and the action effect are executed for the active display area 81SG5F is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect and the action effect are not limited thereto. Is that the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D or the second hold storage display area 81SG5U, or the display mode of the hold display may be changed. The display mode of the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U may be changed by executing the area 81SG5D or the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U itself.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the active display area 81SG5F in the present embodiment emits light based on the start of the variable display, and ends the light emission when the variable display ends. Since it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the variable display is being executed, it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the present embodiment, the active display area 81SG5F is made to emit light while the variable display is being executed, and the active display area 81SG5F is not made to emit light while the variable display is not being executed, so that the player can determine whether or not the variable display is being performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape and size of the active display area 81SG5F depending on whether the variable display is being executed or not. By making the above different, the player may be able to easily recognize whether or not the variable display is in progress.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F, it is possible to execute a waveform advance notice effect and an active display area change effect, and the active display area 81SG5F is more visible to the player than each hold display. Since the characteristics are high, the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F can attract the attention of the player, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the display position of the active display area 81SG5F and the display area of the active display area 81SG5F are larger than the respective hold displays, so that the visibility of the active display area 81SG5F is higher than the visibility of each hold display. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the active display area 81SG5F may be different from the shape of the hold display, or the color of the active display area 81SG5F may be different from the color of the hold display. By doing so, the visibility of the active display area 81SG5F may be made higher than the visibility of each hold display.

In addition, the waveform notice effect and the active display area change effect can be executed in a plurality of effect types, and the jackpot expectation differs depending on which effect type is executed. Therefore, the waveform advance notice is performed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production type of the production and the active display area change production, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the display mode (effect type) of the active display area 81SG5F in the waveform advance notice effect and the display mode (effect type) of the active display area 81SG5F in the active display area change effect each include a plurality of display modes, and the active display area Since the jackpot expectation differs depending on which of the display modes of each effect the 81SG5F is displayed, the player should pay attention to the display mode of the waveform advance notice effect and the active display area change effect. Can be done, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F in the waveform advance notice effect and the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F in the active display area change effect is illustrated. Is not limited to this, for example, as an effect that can be executed during variable display and targets the active display area 81SG5F, the size of the active display area 81SG5F may be changed, or a message may be sent to the active display area 81SG5F. You may execute the effect to be displayed. When executing such an effect, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the size of the active display area 81SG5F and the displayed message.

In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of display modes (effects) in the display mode (effect type) of the active display area 81SG5F in the waveform advance notice effect and the display mode (effect type) of the active display area 81SG5F in the active display area change effect. The form in which the type) is provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F in the waveform advance notice effect and the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F in the active display area change effect. Only one of the display modes may be used.

Further, since the waveform advance notice effect in the present embodiment can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to pay attention to the waveform advance notice effect over the plurality of variable displays, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the development destination suggestion effect in which the pseudo active display 81SG700 similar to the active display area 81SG5F is displayed during the variable display, and the effect mode of the development destination suggestion effect (first development destination). Since the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether it is a suggestion effect or a second development destination suggestion effect (the effect pattern to be executed), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the development destination suggestion effect and improve the game interest. ..

Further, in the first development destination suggestion effect in the present embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the number of shutters 81SG701 that the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the pattern of the shutter 81SG701 that the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through and the display mode of the effect display 81SG702 that is displayed when the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701.

Further, in the first development destination suggestion effect in the present embodiment, a mode in which the pseudo active display 81SG700 automatically breaks through the shutter 81SG701 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first development destination suggestion effect may be an effect of breaking through the shutter 81SG701 in response to the player operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this way, when the first development destination suggestion effect is an effect in which the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701 in response to the operation of the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B, the image display device 5 An operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is displayed, and the display mode of the displayed operation promotion image and the stick controller 31A or push indicated by the displayed operation promotion image are displayed. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the operation mode of the button 31B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29, when the development destination suggestion effect is started, the active display area 81SG5F is changed to the pseudo active display 81SG700, so that the visibility of the pseudo active display 81SG700 from the player is active. Since it is improved compared to the display area 81SG5F, it is possible to further improve the interest of the development destination suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29, when the development destination suggestion effect is started, the first hold storage display area 81SG5D and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U are hidden, so that the development destination suggestion effect can be used. On the other hand, the player can be more noticed, and the interest of the development destination suggestion production can be further improved.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 81SG5U are hidden when the development destination suggestion effect is started. The game is not limited to this, and when the development destination suggestion effect is started, the first hold storage display area 81SG5D and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U are reduced to play against the development destination suggestion effect. The player may be able to recognize the number of reserved memories even during the development destination suggestion production while paying attention to the person.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo active display 81SG700 acts on the shutter 81SG701 which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development destination suggestion effect (the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701). , It is possible to improve the production interest of the development destination suggestion production.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the reach production of the super reach, five types of reach productions of super reach A to super reach E having different jackpot expectations (big hit expectation in reach production: super reach A> super reach B> super Reach C> Super Reach D> Super Reach E) can be executed, and the reach of the jackpot expectation such as the reach production of Super Reach A according to the display mode of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 that changes in the first development destination suggestion production. Since the rate at which the effect is executed is different, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 in the first development destination suggestion effect, and the interest of the first development destination suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, in the first development destination suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the number of shutters 81SG701 that the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through, so that the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through in the first development destination suggestion effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of shutters 81SG701 to be used, and to improve the interest of the first development destination suggestion production.

In the first development destination suggestion effect of the present embodiment, a mode in which the pseudo-active display 81SG700 can break through the shutter 81SG701 a plurality of times is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as the first development destination suggestion effect, at least a part of the effect mode when the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701 may be different each time the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701. , The effect mode when the pseudo active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701 may be the same.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an action effect is executed for the active display area 81SG5F, and the color of the active display area 81SG5F changes as a result of the effect of the action effect. As shown in 31, an action effect that acts on any of the hold displays displayed in the first hold storage display area 81SG5D and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U is executed, and the hold display is displayed as the effect result of the action effect. It may be possible to execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), as an action effect, the character 81SG930 is displayed during the execution of the variation display, and the character 81SG930 displays the color ball 81SG931 in the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D. The effect of throwing toward the hold display displayed in the first display mode (white circle) is executed. As the action effect and the hold change effect, when it is decided to change the display mode of the hold memory display from the first display mode to the second display mode (blue or red circle), FIG. As shown in −31 (A) to 8-31 (C), the display mode of the hold display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode due to the collision of the color ball 81SG931 thrown by the character 81SG930 with the hold display. When the execution is performed in the changing first pattern and it is not decided to change the display mode of the hold display from the first display mode to the second display mode, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and 8-31 (Fig. 8-31). As shown in B) and FIG. 8-31 (D), even if the color ball 81SG931 thrown by the character 81SG930 collides with the hold display, the display mode of the bounce hold display does not change from the first display mode. do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the speed of the color ball 81SG931 is decelerated at the same timing when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern and the second pattern. By starting (deceleration control), the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the color ball 81SG931, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), when the action display speed is reduced and displayed, the display modes other than the hold display, the active display area 81SG5F, and the color ball 81SG931 are before being reduced and displayed. By displaying in a dim manner unlike the display mode of, it is possible to change the action display to improve the fun of the game, and it is possible to effectively incite whether or not the target hold display changes.

In the first modification, the mode in which the speed of the color ball 81SG931 is decelerated at the same timing is illustrated when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern and the second pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display positions of the character 81SG930 and display modes of the character 81SG930 are provided, and the display mode of the character 81SG930 is reserved depending on which position the character 81SG930 is displayed in and the display mode of the character 81SG930. The rate at which the display mode of the storage display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode may be different.

Further, in the present modification 1, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), when the action display speed is reduced and displayed, a display mode other than the hold display, the active display area 81SG5F, and the color ball 81SG931 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the action display is displayed at a reduced speed, the hold display, the active display area 81SG5F, and the color ball 81SG931 are displayed. The mode may be displayed dimly, or the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed dimly.

Further, in the present modification 1, a plurality of display modes may be provided as the change mode of the hold display when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern. Further, when a plurality of display modes are provided as the change modes of the hold display when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern in this way, FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B) By using the hold change mode determination table as shown in the above, the rate at which the change display result corresponding to the hold display targeted by the action effect and the hold change effect becomes a big hit differs depending on the change mode of the hold display. You may do so.

Further, in the present modification 1, in the case where the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern and the case where the hold change effect is executed in the second pattern, the speed deceleration (deceleration control) of the color ball 81SG931 is executed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a period for executing the speed reduction of the color ball 81SG931, a plurality of periods (for example, a speed reduction of the color ball 81SG931 over 3 seconds) are performed. The case of execution and the case of decelerating the speed of the color ball 81SG931 for 5 seconds) may be provided.

When a plurality of periods are provided as the period for executing the speed reduction of the color ball 81SG931 in this way, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) and 8-33 (B), the action effect and the hold change effect are performed. When the first pattern is executed, the speed of the color ball 81SG931 is decelerated at a higher rate than when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the second pattern for a long period (for example, 5 seconds). You may. By doing so, when the speed deceleration of the color ball 81SG931 is executed for a long period (for example, 5 seconds), the speed deceleration of the color ball 81SG931 is performed for a short period (for example, 3 seconds). Since the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern (the display mode of the hold display changes) at a higher rate than when the color ball 81SG931 is executed, the player can reduce the speed of the color ball 81SG931. Can be noticed and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 1, when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern, the period (for example, 5) is higher than that in the case where the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the second pattern. Although the embodiment in which the speed of the color ball 81SG931 is decelerated over (seconds) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the first pattern. May decelerate the speed of the color ball 81SG931 for a shorter period (for example, 3 seconds) at a higher rate than when the action effect and the hold change effect are executed in the second pattern.

Further, in the present modification 1, the mode in which the hold change effect is executed as the effect acting on the hold display and the active display area change effect is executed as the effect acting on the active display area 81SG5F is illustrated in the above-described embodiment. The present invention is not limited to this, and these pending change effects and active display area change effects may be executed at the same time. Further, the jackpot expectation may be different between the hold change effect and the active display area change effect depending on which effect is executed, and the display mode of the hold display changes in the hold change effect. The ratio and the ratio at which the display mode of the active display area 81SG5F changes in the active display area change effect may be different.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the action effect and the vibration display effect can be executed during the fluctuation display of 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 2, these are illustrated. Along with the action effect and the vibration display effect, the effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F (for example, the effect of changing the size and shape of the active display area 81SG5F) can be executed during the variable display of 1. The player may be able to pay attention to how many effects are executed during the variable display. Further, when the action effect, the vibration display effect, and the effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F can be executed during the variable display of 1, the action effect is performed during the execution of the effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F. By shifting the execution period of each effect so that the effect is not executed, the player may pay attention to the effect targeting the active display area 81SG5F, and the player may easily recognize the effect being executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the active display area 81SG5F is made to emit light based on the start of the variable display, and the light emission is terminated when the variable display ends, so that the player is executing the variable display. Although the embodiment for clearly recognizing the existence is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 3, the first reserved storage display area 81SG5D and the second reserved storage display at the start of the variable display Even if it is possible to execute a transition effect in which the hold display displayed in the area 81SG5U shifts to the active display area 81SG5F together with the effect display, and the transition effect is executed when the active display area 81SG5F starts light emission. Good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention by the effect when starting the variable display, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the active display area 81SG5F is made to emit light based on the start of the variable display, and the light emission is terminated when the variable display is completed. As a modification 4, the active display area 81SG5F is terminated from the start timing of the reach effect to draw the player's attention to the reach effect and improve the game entertainment. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine to which the present invention is applied is exemplified as the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game to which the present invention is applied as a modified example 5. The machine can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values such as medals, and a reel capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each. The slot machine may be a slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving the variation display result and a prize can be generated according to the variation display result derived to the reel.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed in the image display device is displayed, and the variable display is not executed in an area different from the specific display in the image display device. The corresponding special display may be displayed. In such a case, as an effect suggesting that the effect control CPU mounted on the effect control board of the slot machine has won the bonus in the variable display that has not been executed, the specific display is described above. It is specified as an effect that makes it possible to execute a waveform notice effect that displays sawtooth waves of different sizes as shown in the embodiment, and also indicates that a bonus has been won in the variable display during execution. It may be possible to execute an effect of changing the display color to blue or red (an effect corresponding to the active display area change effect in the above embodiment).

Further, when the effect control CPU mounted on the effect control board of the slot machine can execute the waveform advance effect and the effect corresponding to the active display area change effect in the above embodiment, the specific display is displayed from the special display. By making the visibility of the specific display higher than the visibility of the special display by displaying it in a large size or in a position that is easily visible to the player, the player's attention is drawn to the mode of the specific display, and the game is enjoyed. May be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the color of the active display area 81SG5F is changed to blue or red during the execution of the variable display, or the hold display based on the start winning prize generated during the variable display is displayed in blue or red. By this means, the embodiment suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit and the variable display result corresponding to each hold display becomes a big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the colors of the active display area 81SG5F and the hold display change is not limited to the execution of the variable display or the start winning prize, but may be the start timing of the variable display or the like. By making it possible to change the color of the active display area 81SG5F and the hold display at the start of the fluctuation in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect at the start of the fluctuation, and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is suggested that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the colors of the active display area 81SG5F and the hold display, and that the variable display result corresponding to each hold display becomes a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by changing the colors of the active display area 81SG5F and the hold display, a specific reach effect can be achieved in the change display and the change display corresponding to each hold display. It may be suggested that it will be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a new start prize is generated, a waveform notice effect and a hold display notice effect can be executed for the variable display based on the start prize. Is not limited to this, and in the next variable display in which the waveform notice effect and the hold display notice effect are executed, the target of the new waveform notice effect or the hold display notice effect is not determined, that is, Waveform notice effect or hold display In the next change display that is the target of the notice effect, the execution of the waveform notice effect or hold display notice effect for different variation display is decided. It may be possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand whether the variable display is the target variable display of the waveform notice effect or the hold display notice effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the hold display is displayed even during the execution of the waveform advance notice effect and the active display area change effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of executing the waveform effect or the active display area change effect, the player may be more focused on the active display area 81SG5F by hiding the hold display from the image display device 5, and the game interest may be improved. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first change destination suggestion effect, a mode in which the color of the pseudo-active display 81SG700 is changed stepwise according to the number of shutters 81SG701 that have passed through is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the variation display result is lost even though the color has changed in the predetermined area of the image display device 5 (for example, the right end portion of the image display device 5) in the first change destination suggestion effect for the past several times. When the pseudo-active display 81SG700 that has become is displayed as a history and the first change destination suggestion effect is newly executed, the pseudo-active display 81SG700 displayed as the history breaks through the shutter 81SG701. You may perform any production.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, even if the active display area 81SG5F is displayed in blue or red as the effect result of the active display area change effect, it suggests the development destination. The form in which the white pseudo-active display 81SG700 is displayed when the effect is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display area 81SG5F is used as the effect result of the active display area change effect. When it is displayed in blue or red, the color of the active display area 81SG5F may be inherited by the pseudo active display 81SG700 when executing the development destination suggestion effect. By doing so, a continuity is created between the active display area change effect and the development destination suggestion effect, so that the player can pay attention to the active display area 81SG5F and the pseudo active display 81SG700. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-29, as the first development destination suggestion effect, an effect in which the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through a plurality of shutters 81SG701 is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the first development destination suggestion effect according to the embodiment, a number (level) corresponding to the number of shutters 81SG701 that the pseudo-active display 81SG700 has exceeded is displayed on the pseudo-active display 81SG700. May be good. In this way, when the pseudo-active display 81SG700 displays a number corresponding to the number of shutters 81SG701 that the pseudo-active display 81SG700 has broken through, the number is updated and displayed (counted) every time the pseudo-active display 81SG700 breaks through the shutter 81SG701. By (up), it is possible to suggest the reach effect and the jackpot expectation to be executed for the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine) that controls the jackpot game state based on the fact that the special symbol or the effect symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot as a variable display result. ), But the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a small hit game is being played. A pachinko game machine (so-called two types of pachinko game machines) that controls a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and a combination in which a special symbol or an effect symbol indicates a big hit as a result of these fluctuations. This is also true for pachinko gaming machines (so-called 1-type + 2-type pachinko gaming machines) that control the game to a large-hit gaming state by both the fact that it is derived and displayed in and that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the small-hit game. The invention may be applied.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), which corresponds to an effect display means (for example, an image display device 5) and variable display. The specific display means (for example, the hold display displayed in the active display area 81SG5F, the first hold storage display area 81SG5D, and the second hold storage display area 81SG5U) and the effect can display the specific display on the effect display means. A second display means that includes an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls execution, and the specific display means displays the specific display in a first display mode (for example, white) and is different from the first display mode. It can be displayed in a display mode (for example, blue or red), and the effect control means changes to the specific display when the display mode of the specific display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. An action effect (for example, an action effect in which the spear 81SG603 pierces the active display area 81SG5F as shown in FIG. 8-27 (L)) and a visibility change that changes the visibility of at least a part of the effect display means. The effect (for example, a vibration display effect that vibrates the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 to the left and right as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (M) and 8-27 (N)) and the above-mentioned action effect. When executing, the visibility change effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (L) to 8-27 (N), the spear 81SG603 is stuck in the active display area 81SG5F. A portion in which the entire image displayed on the image display device 5 later vibrates from side to side), and a variable prize that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. A special state (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the advantageous state of the means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022) and includes changing the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means that can be controlled by the state) (for example, a portion that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) and a special state (for example, a portion that is controlled to the special state more frequently than the normal state). , KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) special state control means (for example, steps S902208A, S902211A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214 in the game control microcomputer 90560. The variable winning means is provided (for example, a portion for executing B) so that the gaming medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example). , A nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds), in the special state. The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) and the variable display period. It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) which is the second period longer than the first period, and in the special state, the second variable The rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the display pattern is lower than the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example, a small hit). In the case of, the ratio determined for the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). (See FIG. 23) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the effect of the production can be improved, and the hobby of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production. The player can pay attention to both whether or not the variable display pattern is controlled to a special state and whether or not the specific display mode changes. Furthermore, it is possible to pay attention to the action effect, the visibility change effect, and the notification of being controlled to a special state. Further, the ratio of being controlled to the special state may differ depending on the presence or absence of the action effect or the visibility change effect. By doing so, it is possible to pay more attention to the action effect and the visibility change effect.

It should be noted that the action effect or the visibility change effect may be associated with the variable display pattern in the special state. For example, in a special state, the action effect and the visibility change effect are more than the case where only the action effect is performed on the hold display displayed in the active display area as a specific display or only the visibility change effect is performed. The rate at which the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern may be higher when both of the above are performed. Further, when both the action effect and the visibility change effect are performed, the variable display may be executed by the second variable display pattern and it may be determined that the special state is not controlled. By doing so, when both the action effect and the visibility change effect are performed, it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not controlled to the special state, so that the variable display period is long and a big hit is expected. In the second variable display pattern, which has a high degree of degree, a player who has stopped launching a game ball in anticipation of an advantageous state (big hit game state) causes the game ball to win a prize in a variable winning means that is controlled to a special state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event such as a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest and enhance the effect of production, it is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Therefore, it is advantageous to have a variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable winning ball device 9022) that can change between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. A step in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that is different from the state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared to a normal state (a part that executes S90358 to S90360). For example, the variable winning means includes steps S902208A, S902211A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, and S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560) after being notified that the variable winning means is controlled to a special state. A game medium launched toward the variable winning means is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened in the small hit game. The first variable display pattern (for example, shortened) in which the variable display period is the first period, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state (realized by setting the period to 0.8 seconds). The second variation pattern # 25, # 27) of the variation and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 26, # including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. 28), and in the special state, the ratio of the variable display controlled by the second variable display pattern to the special state after the variable display is executed is the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. (For example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 23). Can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 901 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying a decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second start condition, which is a second execution condition, are satisfied. A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014) and deriving and displaying the display result. (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display unit 909b), and a display area (hereinafter, the background symbol display unit) in which the player can easily visually recognize the displayed contents as compared with the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. 909c). Note that it is easy to visually recognize the displayed contents, for example, while the size of the display area is large and the displayed contents in the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 909a and second variable display unit 909b), and the background design effect unit 9c has two variable display units. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display 908b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first special symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second special symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a. Further, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of the decorative pattern are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 909a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 909b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved stored number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see it. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are each composed of one display, and the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of reserved storages. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory is set to 4, the upper limit of the second reserved memory is set to 4, and the upper limit of the total reserved memory is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

Above the gate 9032, a nail group 55 forming a flow path of the right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders to the left and right. However, it is designed to flow down. Since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later.

An actuating gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 9017 is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a.

Below the actuating gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (big hit symbol). In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 9, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, these special variable winning ball devices 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 9024 and the second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 9024, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 9, the variable winning ball device 9015 The special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 9022. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 907 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and falls toward the out opening 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 13) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is provided in the special winning opening 9024. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 9013a or the second starting winning opening 9013b. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 9024 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operating gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning opening 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 and launches (so-called right). Hitting operation) is performed. Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 909 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure it so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. Top frame lamps 9028a, left frame lamps 9028b, and right frame lamps 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball burnout lamp 9052 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 908a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 909a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display unit 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 909b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 9020 was opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins in the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The gaming state does not transition to another gaming state before and after the gaming state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly completed when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state is shown, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, the player moves to the right of the gaming area 907 after transitioning to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). That is, it is a case where a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol even though it is in the normal state, and in such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if you hit right in the normal state and a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). (Three background patterns) with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 909c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, at the time of reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 909c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 909c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 10 to 12 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the variable winning is achieved. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 90101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 9024, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 90102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom member 9023 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 907 when the bottom member 9023 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 9023 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom member 9023 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 11 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 12, and the bottom member 9023 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 10 to 12, a flow path forming base 90112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 90101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 90112. The upstream region 9023U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023, and the upstream channel 90113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 9023, A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 9023, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 on the bottom surface member 9023 side, and the special winning openings 9024 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 9023 from below to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024.

The upstream side flow path portion 90113 and the downstream side flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (back side of the game area 907) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112. Has been done. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 90113, a bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream side flow path portion 90114 between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 90118 are formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 90118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension so that a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 90117. One regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion that covers the 90114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulation pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 90118 as described above, referring to FIG. 11, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 12, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 13 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. The input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 to control the game of the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020, the solenoid 90106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the solenoid 90206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 90560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including a effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in the internal or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 14 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port portion 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. It also supplies the decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1 It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 14). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 that controls the effect display device 909. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S904). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device determines the interrupt address. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped, such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b. Execute (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2': Determines which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the initial value of random 1')
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 16, the game control microcomputer 90560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or initial value. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. There may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol process process (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs the hold storage process (step S9027a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect described later are not immediately executed but are executed later. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball processing in step S9030, when the detection signal from the second count switch 9025a is input, the payout control for immediately designating 15 prize balls. A command is output, the payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, but the CPU 9056 uses the CPU 9056. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 18 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 18 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 18A is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 18B is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 18B is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 18 (A). If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 18B, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 18A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 18B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 19A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a 20% probability, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the second KT state. See steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S902210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not the second KT state even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902210A, S902221A, S902212B, and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902213A and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902212B and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902215B and S902010-S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be determinably configured, and various aspects can be considered. Be done.

20 to 22 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of # 01 to # 29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 29) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 20 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 20A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT shown in FIG. 20 (B) is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 20B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 21 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 21C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is targeted by a small hit even in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special prize opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 21 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 21 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 21 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 21 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 21 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are misses or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 or the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 909, a symbol fanning effect such as a reach effect or a sliding effect is executed.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 21 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 21 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 21 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 22 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 22 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 22 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 22 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / 1st KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 22 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 22 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 29.

As shown in FIG. 22 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. Pattern # 28 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 29 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a high rate so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed even shorter in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and execute a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, a specific example of the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation patterns of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 22 (I). In the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 22 (I), judgment values are assigned for each fluctuation pattern, but in the example shown in FIG. 23, they are assigned. The ratio of the judgment values (that is, the determination ratio for each fluctuation pattern) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, when the probability is determined to be out of the range in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rate is 30%. The second variation pattern # 26 including the continuous effect is determined in. Further, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second fluctuation pattern # including the continuous effect is determined at a rate of 5%. 28 is determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol whose display result is not a big hit is displayed as the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, It can be executed by # 27) and a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28).

In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, but the game ball is launched due to the provision of the nail group 55. It is configured to take at least 1.0 second from the to the special variable winning ball device 9022. That is, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit occurs (specifically, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed or after the occurrence of the small hit is notified), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured so that it cannot be forced. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced. There is a risk of causing it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the fluctuation is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # 28) having a relatively long fluctuation time. The rate at which small hits occur after the execution of is lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the variation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Judgment value is assigned to. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined at a rate of 5%. However, it may not be decided. That is, in the KT state (here, the second KT state) by not providing the second fluctuation pattern # 28 or assigning the determination value to the second fluctuation pattern # 28, the fluctuation time varies depending on the fluctuation pattern. The small hit may not occur even after the display is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25, # 27), the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # including the continuous effect are included. 28 is provided, but in place of or in addition to such a configuration, effects other than continuous effects (for example, when the display result is off, when the small hit, and when the big hit are common are common. A variation pattern including (such as the reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

For example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the shortened fluctuation, which is a deviation pattern after the predetermined reach effect is executed, and a fluctuation pattern in which a small hit is obtained after the predetermined reach effect is executed. A fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit after a predetermined reach effect is executed may be provided. Also in this case, the rate at which a small hit occurs after the variation display is executed by the variation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is executed depends on the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27). It is desirable that the judgment value is assigned so as to be lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed. In addition, if a big hit is not achieved after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the percentage of hits is higher than that of a small hit.

In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, one of three or more fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times can be selected, and the ratio of selecting from the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is increased. You may. For example, when the display result is off, when it is a small hit, and when it is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20), respectively. When a fluctuation pattern (variation time 30 seconds) including the second reach effect and a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) is provided. > The selection ratio may be increased in the order of the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds). Further, the fluctuation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) are displayed in this order. If the result is not a big hit, the percentage of misses may be higher than that of a small hit. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the rate at which small hits occur is low (or does not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. Even in the first KT state, the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time may be low (or not generated).

Further, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. Even if the game ball is fired after a hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, or even if the nail group 55 is not provided, a predetermined period (for example, for example) before the game ball arrives at the special winning opening 9024. It may be realized by arranging it at a position that takes 1.0 second or more, which is longer than the opening period.

In addition, when the player is in the KT state, a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 907 (for example, a character display of "right-handed" is displayed on the effect display device 909. When it is configured to display an arrow display indicating the right direction), when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27), and when the variation display is executed. Right-handed notification may be executed in a different manner from when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) having a relatively long variation time. For example, in the KT state, when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28), the rate of small hits is low and the right-handed operation is performed. Since it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player even if it is stopped, it is "right-handed" than when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). The character display and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed stroke. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable right-handed notification according to the situation.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 24 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 24 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (1). As shown in FIG. 24 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (2). As shown in FIG. 24 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variation display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the missing symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is lower than that of a maximum of 10 game balls per round in the big hit game state, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is in progress. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area 907.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is done by executing (see step S9026C). In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) To determine whether or not to make a hit. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be made different by the device. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 24 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 9015 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 24 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 9015, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 9015 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032 The variable winning ball device 9015 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special winning opening 9024 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing the nail group 55 and shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the game ball is variable after passing through the gate 9032 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the winning ball device 9015 is set to start opening, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit generation timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In this embodiment, in order to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation of the normal symbol is provided. Although the time is set as short as 0.2 seconds, the capture element may be eliminated by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the capture element may be eliminated by the position, shape, and opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening 9024 is such that the period until the game ball launched after the small hit occurs reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special winning opening 9024 by the small hit. The position, shape, and opening pattern of the above may be defined.

25 and 26 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) are the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result specification command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol and the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a winning determination result) indicating the content of the winning determination result. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 28) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. To judge. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the result is "missing", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 7 designation command) in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern falls within, and the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern) is obtained. You may send the command shown. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the fluctuation pattern.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 9070. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S90300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S9036) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S90307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S90212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S90213), and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 29) (step S90215). .. In the process of step S90215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1'), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5') are extracted and stored in the storage area. It is stored. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly extracts a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') in the first variation pattern setting process described later. It may be.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 29, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer have a jackpot determination random number (random 1'), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2'), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5'). ) Is memorized. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes the winning determination process (step S90216), and controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, and the big hit type are determined separately. At the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning judgment process is executed in advance to make a big hit. Check whether it will be a small hit and the type of big hit. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1') with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 18A, and determines whether or not they match. Check. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random 1') with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. 18 (A), and they are compared. Check if they match. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90216 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state has changed before the fluctuation display based on the start prize is actually started (for example, if a probability change jackpot or a sudden probability change jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the probability change state is changed from the normal state. It may have changed to.) Therefore, the gaming state at the start winning and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S90216 to S90218 are executed and a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command and the first valid A set of two commands of the start prize designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300, it means that the first special symbol display 908a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved memory number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053A), the value of the first reserved storage area is decremented by 1 (the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processing after step S9064A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting prize, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1') from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064A). Step S9065A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot (step S90160A), the jackpot type is memorized (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. To do. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S9066A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068A is determined.

In step S9065A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 20A to 20B according to the game state. (Step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 20 should be used (step S901700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S901702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 90200.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S901121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S901122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to send the designated command (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the CPU 9056 moves to step S901123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S90304) (step S901124A).

By executing the process of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 90200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 909a in the first variable display unit 909a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S90302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 27 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 36, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S90312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S90322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, It is configured to store a new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (N in step S901125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state is "0" (step S902010), and in "0" If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S902011), and whether or not the value becomes "0". (Step S902012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 9056 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state ( Step S902013) and step S902014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S902014, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S902014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S902015).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S902017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S902019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S902020).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 9017a has been input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first jackpot opening preprocessing. Set to the corresponding value (step S902503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 9017. On the condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a, the game is configured to shift to the big hit game.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S902201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S902202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S902203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S902204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S902209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S902210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S902211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902212A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 28 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forced to be off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to a value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening process (step S90356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S90357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S90359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 24). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350, it means that the second special symbol display 908b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved memory number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally terminated. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S9063B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processing after step S9064B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting prize, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1') from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064B). Step S9065B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S90160B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S90161B). The process proceeds to step S9068B.

If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9068B.

Then, in step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068B is determined.

In step S9065B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7 specified command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) shown in FIG. 32. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 32, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 33 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 33, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S90358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. 34. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 34, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S90357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S902201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S902202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S902203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S902204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S902208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S902208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the start of the jackpot, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S902209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

By executing the processes of steps S902208B to S902210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S902211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S902212B). Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S90701). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. .. In addition, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S90709). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

40 to 42 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is low accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S90630), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S90631). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S90632). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the prize ball counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S90633), and also displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 909, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S90634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S90638). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90639). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display has already been performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S90640), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S90643). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90644). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display has already been performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S90645), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S90648). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the second KT pattern (step S90649). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the second KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display has already been performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S9064, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed. The number of prize balls is displayed during the state), but the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned by executing the process of steps S9063 and S90634. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is executed to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and the processing of step S90649 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening prize designation command (step S90650), the production control CPU 90201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S90650). Along with step S90651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 9024. Along with (step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 9024) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90655).

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball wins in the large winning opening and when the game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large prize opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S90661). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous fluctuation display was a small hit is reset (step S90662), and the small hits are continuously generated. The small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of hits is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect can be executed when the small hits occur continuously, but the process of steps S90662 and S90663 is executed. Therefore, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that becomes a small hit is executed, even if the variable display executed after that becomes a small hit, a continuous small hit The production is configured so that it is not executed.

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201 sends the received symbol specification command to the first free start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step S90665).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step S90666), the effect control CPU 90101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S90706) shown in FIG. 39. In the background symbol process process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes the hold sequence effect control process that controls the hold sequence effect (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 909c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

Process during background symbol change (step S90902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S90903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the fluctuation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S90903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit medium process (step S90908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904), the jackpot display process (step S90904) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S90908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S90904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S90905).

Processing during the round (step S90905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S90906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

Small hit middle processing (step S90908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the hold memories currently stored, that is, a hold sequence that suggests that the jackpot is continuously executed. The production can be performed.

In the hold continuous effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the command indicating the jackpot is included in the set) of the start prize designation command) (step S903502).

When a command indicating a jackpot is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous jackpot confirmation" is displayed, so that there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the currently stored hold memories, and the jackpot is continuous. Is notified that it will be executed.

In this embodiment, when there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the first hold memory related to the variable display of the first special symbol currently stored, or the second hold regarding the variable display of the second special symbol. When there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the memory, it is configured to be able to notify that the big hit is continuously executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the second hold memory. It is possible to notify that the jackpot is continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, and if there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot in the first hold memory, the jackpot continues. It may be configured not to notify that it is executed. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpots are continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a specific jackpot (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the timing during the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either in-round processing (step S90905) or post-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that the timing is during the jackpot game.

If the timing is during the jackpot game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903505), and if it is not set, the process ends. If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not a new round has been started in the jackpot game (step S903506). For example, it can be confirmed by comparing the content of the received large winning opening opening display command with the content of the previously received large winning opening opening display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds during the hold continuous production, and displays the effect based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 controls to display the number of rounds (steps S903507 and S903508). After that, the process ends.

If it is not the timing during the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot end effect processing (step S903907), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the end timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the process ends as it is. .. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the game state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probabilistic change state is controlled after the big hit game, the effect display device 909 displays the character display of "probability change rush", and when the effect control is controlled to the KT state, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In, the character display of "small hit time rush" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the game state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game. For example, at the start timing and the executing timing of the big hit game, the characters "with second KT" may be displayed. Notification may be performed by displaying the character display of "No second KT". Further, also in this case, the notification may not be performed when the hold continuous effect is executed, and the notification may be performed only when the hold continuous effect is not executed.

If the command indicating the jackpot is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 is reset if the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903512), and the value of the total number of rounds counter is also reset. (Step S903513).

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed by the processing of steps S903502 to S903503, at the start of the previous big hit game, the effect display device 909 determines the "continuous big hit". By displaying the character display, it is notified that the jackpot is continuously executed. Further, by the processing of steps S903504 to S903508, the total number of rounds of the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game is shown during the execution of the hold continuous production, and a series of big hit games are executed. You can make it look like it is being done.

Further, by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, when the hold continuous effect is not being executed, the game state (for example, the probability change state or the KT state) controlled after the end of the jackpot game is notified, but the hold continuous effect is executed. When it is inside, those notifications are not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game ends and the normal game starts, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. ..

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the hold continuous production is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if a small hit occurs, the execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is completed and the normal game is being performed, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. it can.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols do not match completely match. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S90618) indicating the small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether or not the display result 7 designated command is stored).

If the variation display started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S90921b), and is set. For example, the process table for holding continuous time according to the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol to be used is selected according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step S90921c). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932. The process table for hold continuous time selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. In this embodiment, the execution of the effect related to the small hit is prohibited during the execution of the hold continuous effect, but for example, it is inconspicuous (for example, the display size is small and the color is small). It may be restricted by executing it in a form (thin, etc.).

If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit flag was set last time (step S90923). If the small hit flag was not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time was not a small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that small hits have occurred continuously. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and small hits occur continuously), the effect control CPU 90201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits is selected ( Step S90925).

In this embodiment, the process of step S90922 is executed so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be feasible in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S90926).

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 46 (A) shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S90924. Further, FIG. 46B shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 2 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 46C shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 2 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 3 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 46 (D) shows the case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 3 or more in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, continuously in the fluctuation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for four or more consecutive small hits) selected in (when small hits occur four or more times) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C. There is. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character A appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit effect B is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character C appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character C.

In this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is different depending on the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the type of character display may be different or the display color of character display may be different depending on the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or the effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed, and various as the continuous small hit effect. It is possible to produce various aspects.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which three types of continuous small hit effects A to C can be executed, but not limited to such a mode, four or more types of continuous small hit effects are continuously small. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit effect.

As shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the previous fluctuation display was not a small hit (that is, when continuous small hits did not occur), there was no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, if the previous variation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined to be N in step S90923, it is as it is. It may be configured to move to step S90931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), when small hits occur twice in succession in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low ratio.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), when small hits occur three times in a row in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), when small hits occur four or more times in succession in the current fluctuation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and a rate of 10%. Is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second continuous small hit fluctuation is high, FIGS. 46 (C) and 46 (D) As shown in the above, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit fluctuation of the third and subsequent times in a row. Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third consecutive small hit fluctuation is high, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), the fourth or more consecutive small hits or more. In the small hit fluctuation, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it becomes difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 46 makes it difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit effect is continuously displayed, the flag is set. If the flag is set, a type of continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variation display is a small hit (when small hits occur continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 46 (B) to 46 (D) is used. Although the case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process, the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variation display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, a case where the type of the continuous small hit effect to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit effects A to C is determined by the lottery process is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, if it is the third small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined, and the small hits of the fourth or more consecutive times are determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the variation pattern and determination of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table corresponding to the type of continuous small hit effect is selected (step S90928). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932.

In this embodiment, the process table selected in step S90928 is used to execute the processes of step S90933, which will be described later, and step S90944 of the background symbol variation processing, so that the effect display device 909 continuously displays the background symbol variation. A small hit effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the rate of the variation display of the shortened variation is increased (the present invention). In the example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (I) and 23, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortening fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%) is shortened. A fluctuation display other than the fluctuation may be performed (in this example, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background symbol fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 45, when the fluctuation display this time is a small hit fluctuation, it is further determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the shortened fluctuation. By executing the processing of steps S90922 to S90928 to enable the continuous small hit effect only when it is a pattern, when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always executed in the variation display of the shortened fluctuation. It is configured as follows.

Unless the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S90929) if it is set, and the number of consecutive small hits. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

After clearing the small hit continuous number counter in step S90930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S90922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927). The effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S90931). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S90933). For example, the background symbol display unit 909c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 26, # 28, # 29), step S90933 and the background described later are described according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By executing the process of step S90944 of the process during the change of the symbol, the continuous effect is executed during the change display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 29), steps S90928 and S90931 By executing the processes of step S90933 and step S90944 of the background symbol changing process described later according to the process table selected in the above, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S90940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S90944).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S90950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S90950, for example, when the effect control CPU 90201 executes the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes an outlier is started, the background symbol The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S90970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S90974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S90983. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is set. The process proceeds to step S90983 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S90971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S90974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S90976). In step S90976, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. In this process table for continuous holding, for example, a big hit game that emphasizes that a new big hit game is started is not executed, a simple fanfare effect is executed, or a big hit game that replaces the fanfare effect is performed. It is configured so that an effect or the like indicating that it is restarted is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the first big hit game and the later big hit game.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90978).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern (step S90979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control is performed to newly start the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display has already been performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the display of the number of prize balls by the jackpot pattern is started or switched (see step S90979) in the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 48, but only in such an embodiment. Absent. For example, in the jackpot display process (step S90904), the process during the first round after starting the jackpot game (step S90905), and the like, the same process as in step S90979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S90985). In step S90985, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. The process table for the pending continuous time is configured such that, for example, the small hit medium effect is not executed, a simple small hit medium effect is executed, or an effect alternative to the small hit medium effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit will be restricted.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90987).

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972 and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S90989).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S90908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S909202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S909203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S909205). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S909206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207 Move to. In step S909207, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the previous small hit flag if it is not set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S909208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variation display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). Therefore, if the small hit game is executed based on the first variation display that becomes the small hit after executing the variation display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, so that the previous time. The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if the small hit occurs again in the next fluctuation display, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice in succession based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when the small hit continuous number counter value is updated to 2 by executing step S909208 by ending the small hit game, and the small hit is made again in the next fluctuation display, the small hit continuous Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that small hits have occurred three times in a row. After that, even if the small hits occur four times, five times, and so on, by checking the value of the small hit continuous number counter, it is possible to check how many times the small hits occur continuously. Can be determined.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S909209).

50 to 53 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S90707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S90501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big prize opening prize flag is set (a prize has occurred in the big winning opening) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern in step S90503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 90201 is set to whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90507). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect execution flag ( Step S90509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S90500 to S90509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the next sixth prize ball number is continuously increased is displayed. However, the first prize ball increase effect will continue to be executed until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By then, the production that increases the number of all prize balls is configured to be completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S90511), and holds the holding sequence. It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the hold continuous production, the processing is terminated as it is without performing a small hit-related effect such as a prize ball increase effect or a prize effect. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, during the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to perform the prize ball at the first speed. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90515). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90516). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90515, the first KT pattern is used. In the display of the number of prize balls displayed, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not the award is satisfied (step S90518). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90520). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90521). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect ( Step S90522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S90655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S90510 to S90522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special winning opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special prize opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect effect (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S90525). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

If the winning effect executing flag is not set (that is, unless the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 909 (for example, character display such as "+15"). (Step S90526) and control to start the winning effect on the effect display device 909 (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90532). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the effect effect (step S90534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls (step S90537). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, S90535 to S90359. The number of prize balls is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds × 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special winning opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special prize opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set (step S90540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the winning effect (step S90542).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as "+15") (step S90545), and starts the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S90546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special prize opening 9024 during the execution of the prize production. In such a case, the prize is waited until the execution of the prize production is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the display of the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 9024 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 9024 is won. (See steps S90523, S90533, S90534).

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, in the background symbol process process, a step is performed. The prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be executed before the processes of S90900 to S90908 are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display and a prize production are executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024. For example, the special prize opening lamp 9024a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 9024, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a game machine configured to have a so-called general prize opening (a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a prize is won). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, specific examples of the KT notification and the small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification. Further, FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of restrictions on KT notification and small hit notification. In addition, in FIGS. 54 and 55, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the hold continuous production is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 54 (A), during the big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), when the big hit game is completed, a character display 90312 such as the line "small hit time rush" of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification notifying that the game is controlled to the second KT state. (See step S903511).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) and 54 (D), when the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed, the small hit is derived. As a notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is displayed. In addition, the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern is displayed.

FIG. 55 shows a specific example when the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted while the hold continuous production is being executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (A), during the first big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), even if the big hit game is completed, the KT notification is not performed because the hold continuous production is being executed (that is, the character display 90312 such as "small hit time rush" is displayed. (See steps S903509 to S903510), character 90301 and character display 90302 continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display after the first big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not performed. (That is, the character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is not displayed). At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (C), the number of rounds (“Round 16” in this example) is continuously displayed from the time of the final round of the first jackpot game, and the dialogue of the character 90301 is “still more! Character display 90313 such as "" is displayed, and it seems that the jackpot game is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), when the second big hit game is started, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and characters such as "Big hit!" Are displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301. Display 90302 is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (D), the number of rounds displayed (“Round 17” in this example) is displayed by adding the number of rounds of the first big hit game to the number of rounds of the second big hit game. , It seems that a series of jackpot games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 55, it is possible to produce a production in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order through the previous jackpot game period, the variable display period after the jackpot game ends, and the later jackpot game period. It may be executed or a specific movie image (for example, an image of a video in which a character operates based on a specific story) may be displayed to make it appear that a series of jackpot games are being executed. ..

Next, the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), when the jackpot game is started, if the pending memory 4 that is the jackpot exists among the currently stored reserved memories 1 to 4, the jackpot is continuously executed. Notification of the pending ream is performed to notify that. In this case, after the jackpot game is completed, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed. Further, even if a small hit occurs based on the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted.

When it is notified that a big hit occurs multiple times in a short period of time by the hold continuous production, at the same time, it is also notified that the period controlled to the KT state (particularly the second KT state) after the big hit game is short. There is a risk of degrading the interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hits are continuously executed by the hold continuous production, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the end of the big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs. By restricting the small hit notification (and the display related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect), it makes the player feel that a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is prevented that the holding rendition will rather reduce the interest.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of the first big hit or the second big hit, when the big hit game is started, if there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, the hold continuous production can be executed. For example, the jackpot type of the later jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot not controlled by the second KT state, the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot of the previous jackpot. If either of the types is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled by the second KT state), or if both are applicable, it is notified that the second KT state is a short period of time. Therefore, the execution of the hold continuous effect may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency may be reduced). Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the KT state (or the second KT state) is always controlled after the big hit game, the hold continuous effect may be executed.

Further, the situation in which the hold continuous effect can be executed is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal that is not controlled to the second KT state). When the jackpot is 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot and 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous production is executed. It may be possible. In this case, after the end of the previous jackpot game, it is not controlled to the second KT state, and it is desirable that the next jackpot occurs earlier. Therefore, the holding continuous production does not rather reduce the interest. .. Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game this time. In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type of the later jackpot. If the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state, a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R normal jackpot, and a 6R probability variation jackpot), the hold continuous production can be executed. You may try to do it. Even in this case, it is desirable that the next big hit occurs early, so that the pending continuous production does not rather reduce the interest.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), when both the first jackpot and the latter jackpot type are 16R probability variation jackpots (that is, jackpots controlled in the second KT state), the jackpot game starts. When the jackpot is played (or during the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game), after notifying that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game this time, a pending sequence that notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed. May be notified. In this case, even if a small hit occurs based on the hold 1-3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the effect related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect) is performed. Restrict it so that it will not be damaged. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized in the same situation as in the case of FIG. 56 (B) above, and rather deteriorating the interest due to the hold continuous production.

In addition, when executing the hold continuous production, the control to make it appear that a series of big hit games is being executed is not performed, and the normal game is performed between the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. You may.

FIG. 57 shows a modified example of the hold continuous effect control process in the example shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C) in which a normal game is performed between the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the hold continuous effect control process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the set of the start prize designation command) includes a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state) (step S903510).

When the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is not included (N in step S903510), whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 is controlled to the second KT state after the jackpot game this time according to the jackpot type this time. (Step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "with second KT" and the character display of "without second KT". After that, if the hold continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the process ends.

When a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot is included (Y in step S903510), if the jackpot this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 this time. After the big hit game of, the player is notified that the second KT state is not controlled (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "no second KT".

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot exists in the hold memory and the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous big hit confirmation" is displayed to notify that the big hits are continuously executed. After that, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the process.

By executing the processes of steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, it is controlled to a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot that is not controlled by the second KT state, a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 6R probability variation jackpot). Occasionally, if there is a hold memory that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect can be executed. Further, when the processing of steps S903510, S903511, S903512, and S903513 is executed to control the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the second KT state) is controlled. If there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot controlled by), the hold continuous effect can be executed after notifying that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state. In the example of FIG. 57, the hold continuous effect is executed after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. However, the hold continuous effect is not limited to such a configuration. (That is, after notifying that the jackpots are continuously executed), it may be notified that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot not controlled by the second KT state.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 58 to 61 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 58 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 59 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 60 and 61 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 58 to 61, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 58, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S90979), and for example, the character 90301 is displayed. Then, a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a case is shown in which the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90300 by the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 909, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 58 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. When is generated, for example, a character display 304 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, as the prize ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes a second prize ball increase effect (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 59 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern (see step S90649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the prize ball number display 90305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 90305 is started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 60B, a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305 as an effect effect. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 9024, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526) and a prize effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 60B, there is a case where a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a prize effect and a character display 90309 such as “+15” is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60C, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 909, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 3 is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). ~ S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (C) to 61 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the prize-winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect is completed as shown in FIG. 61 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 61 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S90526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S90527).

After that, the second prize ball increase effect is performed until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 9024 generated additionally in FIG. 61 (E) are updated. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, as an effect effect, an effect image 90307 in a form that glitters around the prize ball number display 90305 is displayed, but the case is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 90305 may be executed in some form, such as displaying an image of an aspect that covers the prize ball number display 90305. By acting on the prize ball number display 90305 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 90305 difficult to see.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 60 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. It may be configured to add up and display the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state until the KT state is terminated and the state shifts to the non-KT state. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by recognizing the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 62, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S90530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S90523). Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62, in the small hit game in the second KT state, if a second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 62, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 62. In addition, after the winning effect for the first prize is finished, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 9024 (special variable winning ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 62, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the winning production.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In FIG. 63, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variation display, which is a small hit, the variation display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right is started as shown in FIG. 63 (A). In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect is reached during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 63 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. Along with the appearance of the A90310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character A90310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 63 (B-2). Along with the appearance of the character B90312, the continuous small hit effect B is executed in a manner of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character B90312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 63 (B-3). Along with the appearance of the character C90313, the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character C90313.

Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 64 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if small hits are not continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be infeasible (see steps S90929 and S90930), such as when the small hit occurs only in a single shot, such as when the fluctuation display of is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when small hits are continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which small hits are continuously generated. It is feasible (see steps S90921a-S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which small hits are continuously generated are started (step). (See S90926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a case is shown in which a continuous small hit effect can be executed during the fluctuation display in which a small hit occurs, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, the continuous small hit effect may be enabled to be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variation display in which the small hit occurs.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect is determined at the start of the variation display when the small hits occur continuously, but the processing mode is not limited to such. .. For example, the effect control microphone computer 90200 determines at the timing when the small hit game is started when the small hit occurs (for example, after determining Y in step S90983 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 48). Based on the winning determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, and the fluctuation display to be started next is also small. If it is a hit, the same process as in steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

Further, for example, the effect control microphone computer 90200 has a timing (for example, during the small hit game) when a small hit occurs and a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit game during the small hit game. At any timing in the middle of the small hit game, such as the timing when the start prize is generated during the small hit game), the next start is based on the look-ahead judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is also a small hit, and if the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, the same process as in step S90926 shown in this embodiment is followed. The presence / absence and type of continuous small hit effect may be determined. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect may be executed from the timing in the middle of the small hit game to the next variation display.

Further, in this embodiment, when the plate on which the game ball is paid out (the hitting ball supply plate 903 or the surplus ball receiving plate 904) becomes full, the full tank notification may be executed. For example, the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiver 904 can be detected by a detection means such as a sensor, and when the detection means detects that the stored amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the effect is produced. The display device 909 displays the character "full tank error" or outputs an error sound to execute the full tank notification. Here, in this embodiment, the prize balls are paid out more frequently in the jackpot game state and the second KT state, but in the second KT state, the prize balls are not paid out as much as in the jackpot game state. The full tank condition is easily resolved. Therefore, the execution mode of the full tank notification may be different between the jackpot game state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed. You may want to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015) that can change between the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. And the special variable winning ball device 9022), which is a state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared with the normal state. Then, the variable winning means is provided so that the gaming medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, the flow of the game ball is delayed). It is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). Further, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. Then, in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 23). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the related effects related to the special state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, etc.) The related effect executing means that can execute the effect) and the hold related to the variable display that triggers the control of the advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pending continuous effect) suggesting that information is included, and when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the earlier advantageous state and the later Restriction means for restricting the execution of related effects when controlled to a special state with the advantageous state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effects, display of prize ball increase display during execution of hold continuous effects, The execution of productions related to small hits, such as prize-winning effects, is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, it is a variable that triggers the control to the first advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means. The suggestion effect can be executed when the pending information regarding the display is included (see, for example, FIG. 56B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first advantageous state is controlled, the hold information stored by the hold storage means includes the hold information related to the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state. In this case, the suggestion effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 56C). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means (for example, effect display) capable of executing the promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route when controlled to the special state. The device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), and the promotion notification means is when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. , The promotion notification may be executed in a different manner from the time when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time in the KT state (that is,). , The variation display is executed by the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) than when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). , The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, a storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hit ball supply plate 903 or a surplus ball receiver 904) and a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. The tongue notification means (for example, realized by displaying the character "full tank error" in the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound) is provided, and the tongue notification means is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when the player is in the state and when the game is controlled in the special state (for example, in the second KT state, it is more modest than in the jackpot game state. The full tank notification may be executed depending on the mode (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), or when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount in the big hit game state. , The full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game) has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state. It can be controlled to a special state (state), and when the display result of the variable display becomes a special result (small hit symbol in this example), it can be controlled to a special state. Further, in the special state, the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is frequently executed, and the second 2 It may be a small hit only when the variable display of the special symbol is executed). Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, "high degree of advantage" means, for example, when the player is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) or a special state (in this example, a small hit game state). It means that there is a high degree of expectation for acquisition of game media per game. For example, the variable winning ball device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 9020, the special variable winning ball device 9022) may be opened for a long time or may be opened many times, so that many prizes may be obtained or one prize may be obtained. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a lot of game value, such as getting a lot of balls.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control a special state that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a small hit game state), and based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (in this example, a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased as compared with before the special condition is satisfied. Further, in the special state, when the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (in this example, the continuous small hit effect) is executed. It is possible. Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the counting display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). It is possible, and the first display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern) and the second display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted more than the first display mode. ), The count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, in the big hit pattern during the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 909. As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated near the center of the effect display device 909). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is displayed as the counting display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when some gauge display or countdown display is performed in the effect as the count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 is shown as a predetermined opportunity, but it is not limited to such a mode, for example, some gauge display level. It may be the one that the condition of up is satisfied. Further, for example, in the case of applying to a slot machine, it may be assumed that a predetermined opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of a small winning combination or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display is additionally displayed as an update display, but not limited to such an embodiment, when some count display is subtracted and displayed, this implementation is performed. It may be configured to apply the configuration shown in the form.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 has the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc. shown in 12, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine in which a game medium such as a ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
901 Pachinko game machine 908a 1st special symbol display 908b 2nd special symbol display 909 effect display device 909a 1st variable display unit 909b 2nd variable display unit 909c background symbol display unit 9013 1st start winning port 9013a 1st start port Switch 9014 2nd start winning opening 9014a 2nd starting opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Acting gate 9017a Acting gate switch 9018c Design hold storage display unit 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom member 9024 Special winning opening 9023a 1st count switch 9025a 2nd count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 Production control board 90200 Production control microcomputer 90201 Production control CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can execute variable display,
Production display means and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display on the effect display means, and
A production control means that controls the execution of the production,
With
The specific display means can display the specific display in a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode.
The effect control means
When the display mode of the specific display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, an action effect acting on the specific display and an action effect.
A visibility change effect that changes the visibility of at least a part of the effect display means,
It said visibility change effect in performing the action effect, it is possible to execute,
further,
Game media and changeable variable Hente stage first state and a game medium can pass through the predetermined region in the non or difficult second state passes a predetermined region,
The advantageous state is a different state, and controllable special state control means to the special conditions including that the friendly Hente stage is changed to the first state,
Wherein the special state control means capable of controlling the special state frequency to be controlled is high in a special state, as compared to the normal state,
The game price is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state.
It is provided with a granting effect executing means that can execute the granting effect when a value is given .
The friendly Hente stage game media which are propelled toward the movable Hente stage is provided so that it can not pass through the predetermined region after the to be controlled to the special state is notified,
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. rather than lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the giving effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the giving effect is not executed.
A game machine characterized by that.